JP2021164842A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine can output music in a variation performance having a variable display of a special drawing pattern. The game machine can carry out a first performance and a second performance during the variation performance. When the game machine carries out the first performance and the second performance in the variation performance, the game machine continuously outputs the music during the first performance. It is thus possible to proceed the performance according to the stream of the music. On the other hand, the game machine stops the BGM in the second performance. It is thus possible to emphasize the second performance and attract the attention on the second performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition.

Conventionally, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, various effects are performed based on the determination result of whether or not to perform a special game, and there is a game machine that outputs, for example, music during the execution of the effect (for example, a patent). Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-96091

However, when the sound is output during the execution of the production, there is room for improvement in order to improve the interest.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

The present invention has adopted the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the starting condition is satisfied, and the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means can receive a predetermined signal. Based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute the first effect and the second effect in which the expectation level at which the special game is performed is different from that of the first effect, and the first effect or the second effect can be performed. Before the execution, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the operable operation means, and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means. During the first effect, the output of the first sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect can be continued, and during the operation promotion effect and the second effect, before the execution of the operation promotion effect. It is possible to stop the output of the second sound that has been output and output a specific sound suggesting that a special game may be executed during a predetermined period in which the second sound is stopped after the start of the operation promotion effect. It is possible.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest by using sound.

Schematic front view of pachinko gaming machine 1 Schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of posture mode of effect lever 28 Block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the game control unit 100. Detailed flowchart of the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. A flowchart showing the details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. A flowchart showing the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the stopped processing of step S416 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol processing of step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the large winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of electric tulip processing in FIG. It is a figure which shows the breakdown of the jackpot symbols selected according to the winning of each start opening, and is the figure which shows the content of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol. A diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used to select a jackpot fluctuation pattern, which is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. It is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is lost and it is determined that the variation time of a predetermined time or more is selected by using the reach random number, and the reach variation used for selecting the reach variation pattern. Diagram showing an example of a pattern table This table is used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the fluctuation time of a predetermined time or longer is not selected by using the reach random number, and the loss is used to select the loss fluctuation pattern. The figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table A diagram showing the variation of the special symbol when the loss variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the flow of the effect performed accordingly. A diagram showing a specific example of the effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 5 when the loss fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The figure which shows an example of the composition of the music used in the production of a pachinko game machine 1. A diagram showing the fluctuation of the special symbol and the flow of the fluctuation effect when the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the reach fluctuation pattern is selected. The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the N reach effect is performed. The figure which shows an example of the screen diagram in the case where the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, and the effect by the effect pattern of FIG. 23 is performed. The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. It is an example of the screen diagram following FIG. 26, and is a diagram showing an example of the screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. It is an example of the screen diagram following FIG. 26, and is a diagram showing an example of the screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the pseudo-variation effect is performed. The figure which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern in each production The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the SP reach effect further develops into the SPSP reach effect. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram after the SP reach production is started. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram in the case where the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, which is an example of the effect following FIG. 32 (H). A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram in the case where the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, which is an effect following FIG. 32 (F). The figure which shows an example of the control of the sound after the end of the SPSP reach production in the case of a big hit or a loss. The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the SPSP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. A diagram showing an example of a screen diagram when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. It is an example of the screen diagram following FIG. 37, and is a diagram showing an example of the screen diagram when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the first effect is executed when BGM1 is output when the result of a special symbol determination is a big hit. The figure which shows an example of the reproduction position of BGM at the time when each effect is started. The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the premiere effect is executed when BGM1 is output when the result of a special symbol determination is a big hit. A diagram showing an example of BGM control when an operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect in the effect pattern of FIG. 41 when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a second operation promotion effect and BGM control at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect. An example of BGM control when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the premier effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. Figure showing The figure which shows an example of the control of BGM when the advance notice effect is executed when BGM1 is output when the result of a special symbol determination is a big hit. An example of BGM control when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the advance notice effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. Figure showing A diagram showing an example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. A diagram showing another example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The figure which shows an example of the production following FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and is the figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. A diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed according to an operation during the third operation promotion effect. FIG. 53 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed immediately before the third operation promotion effect. FIG. 53 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed during the third operation promotion effect. FIG. 53 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed without a third operation promotion effect and the SPSP reach effect is developed. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 130. A flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG. 57. Detailed flowchart of hold command processing in step 1302 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of the image / sound control unit 140 A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the image / sound control unit 140. Detailed flowchart of the process during the variation effect in step 1404 of FIG. 62. Detailed flowchart of the sound control process in step S1422 of FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining a modification of the additional display which is displayed by being added to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. Explanatory drawing for explaining modification of the decorative symbol of 1st aspect and 2nd aspect

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Rough configuration example of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 provided with accessories related to winning and determination (lottery), and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 into which the game ball can flow down. Has been done.

When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game ball stored in the upper plate 28 is guided to the launching device (not shown), and the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the lever 21 is applied. It is fired into the game area 10. A game nail, a windmill, or the like (not shown) is provided in the game area 10, and the launched game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10 and comes into contact with the game nail, the windmill, or the like. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. The launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped by the player operating the stop button 22.

The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for storing prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23 arranged close to the lower plate 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls collected in the lower plate 29 are arranged below the lower plate 29. It falls into a box (not shown).

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" that maintains the state in which the lever 21 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" that maintains the state in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two ordinary winning ports 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passage path of the left-handed game ball as accessories related to winning and judgment. Has been done. In addition, in the passage path of the right-handed game ball, the second start opening 12, the large winning opening 13, the two ordinary winning openings 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip are used as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 is provided.

The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters any of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 13, and the normal winning opening 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And win a prize. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning points are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

The first starting port 11 as the first starting area is a starting port that is always open, and the second starting port 12 as the second starting area is operated by the electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins a prize, or when the game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player. Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball is won in the first starting port 11 is called "first special symbol determination", and the determination is performed on the condition that the game ball is won in the second starting port 12. The determination to be executed is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these determinations (lottery) are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination (special symbol lottery)".

The large winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the large winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the large winning opening 13. The grand prize opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the above plate is operated to open the jackpot 13 in the jackpot game. Is executed. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the jackpot game as compared with the case where the jackpot game is not performed.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to be able to change its posture between a closed posture in which a pair of blade members close the second starting port 12 (see FIG. 1) and an open posture in which the second starting port 12 is opened (not shown). ing.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened, the operation of the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintaining the open posture for a predetermined time and then returning to the closed posture is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, whereas the game ball is easily passed in the second starting port 12 when the electric tulip 17 is operating. Become. In the following description, the determination (lottery) executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is referred to as "ordinary symbol determination (ordinary symbol lottery)".

The ordinary winning opening 14 is always open like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. In addition, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, the determination (lottery) is not performed even if the game ball wins in the normal winning opening 14.

[Structure example of the production means of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 has a liquid crystal display device 5, a movable accessory 7, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25, an effect button 26, and an effect as various effects. A lever 71 is provided. Further, the frame member 3 has a built-in frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 5) which is not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible by the player. On the liquid crystal display device 5, for example, various display objects such as a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, and a hold display for displaying the number of the special symbol determinations pending. An effect image including is displayed. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The movable accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and is normally retracted to a retracted position between the screen and the game board 2 on the left and right sides of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 to operate. Sometimes it is configured to advance to the front of the screen. A light emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the movable accessory 7, and a part or all of the movable accessory 7 emits light by causing the LED to emit light. The movable accessory 7 performs various effects by operating or emitting light based on the result of the special symbol determination.

The board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color. The speaker 24 outputs music, voice, sound effects, and the like so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 5, and performs a sound effect.

[Structure example of operating means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operating means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The effect button 26 is configured to be able to project upward by a drive mechanism (not shown), and its upper surface is configured to project more than usual when an effect is executed using the effect button 26. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect may be performed according to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, an effect lever 28 is provided on the upper portion of the frame member 3 as an operating means operated by the player. The effect lever 28 is for the player to input operation information by performing an operation of pulling downward or toward the front.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing an example of the posture mode of the effect lever 28. As shown in FIG. 4, the effect lever 28 includes a grip portion that can be gripped by the player and a support portion for supporting the grip portion. The effect lever 28 is placed between a "normal posture" in which the grip portion is located above (see FIG. 4 (A)) and a "pull-down posture" in which the grip portion is located below (see FIG. 4 (C)). The position of the grip portion can be changed. For example, when the operation promotion effect is performed at the end of the SPSP reach effect described later, and the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the effect lever 28 is changed from the normal posture to the lowered posture by the player's pulling operation. Accordingly, a jackpot notification effect for notifying the jackpot is performed.

Further, for example, in various effects, a light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED built in the effect lever 28 emits light. Further, the effect lever 28 may be used for a vibration effect that vibrates the grip portion by operating a motor built in the grip portion.

[Configuration example of display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to the special symbol determination and the normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first display It includes a special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game status indicator 47, a round indicator 48, and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 changes the symbol and then stops and displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, thereby determining the first special symbol. Notify the judgment result. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 determines the second special symbol by variablely displaying the symbol and then stopping and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Notify the judgment result. In the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42, as the determination symbol, the jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is "big hit" or the determination result of the special symbol determination is "missing". The lost symbol indicating that "" is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol hold indicator 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination. The game status display 47 displays the gaming status at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The round display 48 displays the number of rounds of the big hit game when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as a "second special symbol". Are collectively called "special designs". Further, the symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 45 is referred to as a "ordinary symbol".

[Configuration of control device for pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a game control unit 100 and a game control unit that control execution of determination (lottery), control of a jackpot game, command transmission processing to the effect control unit 130, and the like. The effect control unit 130 that comprehensively controls the effect based on the command received from 100, the image / sound control unit 140 that controls the effect by images and sounds, and the lamp control that controls the effect by various lamps and movable accessories 7. The unit 150 is provided. In addition to the one shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a payout control unit (not shown) that controls the payout of prize balls.

[Structure of game control unit 100]
The game control unit 100 includes a CPU 101, a ROM 102, and a RAM 103. Based on the program stored in the ROM 102, the CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to the number of payout prize balls such as an internal lottery and a winning determination. The RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the CPU 101 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The game control unit 100 includes a first start port switch (SW) 111, a second start port switch (SW) 112, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 113, a first gate switch (SW) 114, and a second gate switch (SW) 115. , The large winning opening switch (SW) 116, the large winning opening control unit 117, the normal winning opening switch (SW) 118, and the display 4 are connected.

The first start port switch 111 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 12, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 opens / closes the second starting port 12 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be drive-transmissible in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The second gate switch 115 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The large winning opening switch 116 detects that the game ball has won the large winning opening 13, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The large winning opening control unit 117 opens and closes the large winning opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid connected to a plate that closes the large winning opening 13 so as to be drive-transmitted in response to a control signal from the game control unit 100. do. The normal winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning opening 14, and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100.

The CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 is a place where the game ball wins when a detection signal is input from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the large winning opening switch 116, or the normal winning opening switch 118. The payout control unit is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the above, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control unit.

The CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when the result of the special symbol determination becomes a big hit, the special game is executed by opening and closing the big winning opening 13 via the big winning opening control unit 117. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 is input, and executes a normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. Then, when the result of the normal symbol determination is successful, the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing portion 113.

Further, the CPU 101 transmits information indicating the fluctuation start or fluctuation stop of the special symbol to the effect control unit 130. Further, the CPU 101 transmits information regarding the fluctuation setting of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation setting of the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery to the effect control unit 130. Further, the CPU 101 transmits data indicating a setting for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, information for notifying the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 that the game ball has won a prize, and the like to the effect control unit 130. ..

Further, the CPU 101 executes the following processing on the display 4. That is, when the first special symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 causes the first special symbol display 41 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the second special symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 causes the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the normal symbol determination is executed, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the determination result.

Further, the CPU 101 causes the first special symbol hold display 43 to display the number of holds for the first special symbol determination, displays the hold number for the second special symbol determination on the second special symbol hold indicator 44, and makes a normal symbol determination. Is displayed on the normal symbol hold indicator 46. Further, the CPU 101 causes the gaming status display 47 to display the gaming status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 101 causes the round display 48 to display the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

[Structure of effect control unit 130]
The effect control unit 130 includes a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 133, and an RTC (real-time clock) 134. The CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect based on the program stored in the ROM 132. The RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the CPU 131 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like. The RTC134 measures the current date and time.

The effect control unit 130 sets the effect content based on the data indicating the result of the special symbol determination sent from the game control unit 100. The effect control unit 130 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

The image / sound control unit 140 controls the image display of the liquid crystal display device 5 and the sound output of the speaker 24. A configuration example of the image / sound control unit 140 will be described later.

[Structure of lamp control unit 150]
The lamp control unit 150 includes a CPU 151, a ROM 152, and a RAM 153. Based on the program stored in the ROM 152, the CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the operations of the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, the effect lever 28, and the movable accessory 7. The RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the CPU 151 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

Light emission pattern data and operation pattern data are stored in the ROM 152. The light emission pattern data is data showing the light emission patterns of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 25, and the movable accessory 7. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the movable accessory 7.

The CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 to the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the effect lever 28. , And control the light emission of the light emitting element of the movable accessory 7. Further, the CPU 151 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the ROM 152 into the RAM 153, and presses the movable accessory 7, the effect button 26, and the effect lever 28. Controls the drive of the motor to operate.

[Explanation of game status]
Here, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming state includes a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a jackpot is the first probability, and a high-probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a jackpot is a second probability higher than the first probability. Probability change game state).

The first probability and the second probability, which are jackpot probabilities, may be fixed values. Further, the first probability and the second probability may be changed depending on the setting.

For example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by the hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the setting value related to the jackpot probability is determined according to the operation (for example, pressing) of the setting value switch (not shown) provided on the back surface of the gaming control board 100. (For example, any value from "1" to "6") can be set. The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to a different probability.

For example, the larger the value of the set value, the easier it is to win a jackpot, and the ratio of the second probability, which is the jackpot probability in the high-probability gaming state, to the first probability, which is the jackpot probability in the low-probability gaming state, does not depend on the set value. It may be fixed. For example, the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state is set to 1/220 when the set value is "1", and is set to 1/200 when the set value is "2", and the set value is set. When it is "3", it is set to 1/180. Further, the jackpot probability in the high probability gaming state is set to 1 / 27.5 (= 1/220 × 8 times) when the set value is “1”, and the set value is “2”. Sometimes it is set to 1/25 (= 1/200 x 8 times), and when the set value is "3", it is set to 1 / 22.5 (= 1/180 x 8 times).

A setting key, a setting change switch, and a setting value display device may be provided for setting the jackpot probability. The setting change switch may be provided exclusively for it, or may be used in combination with a RAM clear switch (a switch for initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100). When the setting change switch is used together with the RAM clear switch, for example, when the setting key is turned on (pressed) and the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the jackpot probability is set. When the mode is changed to the change mode, the setting key is turned on, and the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the mode is changed to the jackpot probability setting confirmation mode, the setting key is turned off, and the setting key is turned off. When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the mode shifts to the RAM clear mode (mode in which the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is initialized and the game machine is started), the setting key is turned off, and the setting key is turned off. And when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned off, the game machine is operated in the power recovery mode (the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is not initialized, and the data at the time of the previous power off is maintained. You may shift to the start-up mode). The gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding the data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 5) of the gaming control unit 100 when the power is turned off, and the power is supplied for a certain period (for example, 24 hours). It is configured so that the data of the RAM 103 can be maintained even if it is cut off.

Further, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a non-auxiliary gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state. The auxiliary gaming state has a relatively high probability of being determined as a hit in the normal symbol determination (for example, 1 / 1.1) as compared with the non-auxiliary gaming state. Further, in the auxiliary game state, the opening time of the electric tulip 17 when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds x 3 times), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relative. It is in a very short state (for example, 2 seconds). That is, in the auxiliary game state, when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, a normal symbol determination is performed, and a hit is made with a relatively high probability, and the second starting port 12 is opened for 1.8 seconds x 3 times. The game ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Further, in the auxiliary game state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened as compared with the non-auxiliary game state.

On the other hand, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination is relatively low (for example, 1/50) as compared with the auxiliary gaming state, and when it is determined to be a hit in the normal symbol determination. The opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-auxiliary game state, when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, even if the normal symbol determination is performed, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second starting port 12 is 0.1 seconds × Since it is opened only once, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second starting port 12.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 is set to the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and is set to the auxiliary gaming state or the non-auxiliary gaming state.

The low-probability gaming state and the non-assisted gaming state are referred to as a "normal gaming state", and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initially set to the normal gaming state. Further, a high-probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state are referred to as a "probability variation gaming state". Further, a low-probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state are referred to as a "short-time gaming state".

[Direction mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the production is performed in any of the three production modes corresponding to the current gaming state, except during the jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the normal mode is used, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic mode is used, and when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the time-saving mode is used. Each production is performed at.

In the normal mode, there are a plurality of production modes (stages, for example, stage A, stage B, etc.). The stage itself does not show the reliability of the jackpot, and each effect (notice effect, final effect, reach effect, etc.) described later can be executed in any of the normal modes of stage A and stage B.

[Main processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the main process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the game control unit 100. The game control unit 100 repeats a series of processes shown in FIG. 6 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by an interrupt during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Run. The processing of the game control unit 100 described based on the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 6 and 6 is performed by the CPU 101 executing the program stored in the ROM 102.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to select a fluctuation pattern having a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more when the result of the special symbol determination is lost. The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for determining the winning or losing of the ordinary symbol lottery. The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable pattern random number, and the ordinary symbol random number are generated by, for example, a random number generator each time the process of step S1 is performed.

Following step S1, the CPU 101 executes the start port switch (SW) process (step S2). In the start port switch process, the CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of input of a detection signal from the first start port switch 111 or the second start port switch 112, and each random number (big hit random number, which is appropriately updated by the process of step S1). For the symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number), the value at the time when the detection signal is input is acquired and stored in the RAM 103. This start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 7.

Following step S2, the CPU 101 executes a gate switch (SW) process (step S3). In the gate switch processing, the CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115, and when the detection signal is input, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number updated in the processing of step S1. And store it in RAM 103. This gate switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S3, the CPU 101 executes special symbol processing (step S4). Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol processing, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined. Further, the CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination using the random number acquired in the start port switch process in step S2, and causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner. The special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed from. The special symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S4, the CPU 101 executes normal symbol processing (step S5). In the normal symbol processing, the CPU 101 executes the normal symbol determination using the normal symbol random number acquired in the gate switch process in step S3, causes the normal symbol display 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then results in the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. The ordinary symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S5, the CPU 101 executes a large winning opening process for opening and closing the large winning opening 13 via the large winning opening control unit 117 when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol determination in the special symbol processing in step S4. (Step S6). The big winning opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S6, the CPU 101 executes the electric tulip process (step S7). In the electric tulip processing, when the CPU 101 wins the ordinary symbol lottery in the ordinary symbol processing in step S5, the CPU 101 operates a pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing portion 113. The electric tulip treatment will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S7, the CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for managing the number of prize balls won and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the winning (step S8). Specifically, when a game ball wins in any of the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 13, and the ordinary winning opening 14, the CPU 101 receives a number of prizes according to the winning place. Pay out the ball. For example, the CPU 101 pays out three prize balls when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, and 15 prize balls when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 13. Pay out.

Following step S8, the CPU 101 executes an output process (step S9). In the output process of step S9, the CPU 101 transmits various commands set in the RAM 103 in the start port switch process of step S2, the special symbol process of step S4, the grand prize opening process of step S6, and the like to the effect control unit 130.

[Starting port switch processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the details of the start port switch process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the start port switch process in step S2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the first start port switch 111 is “ON” (whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11). To judge. When it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is "ON" (step S201: YES), the hold number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reserved symbols Umax1 (for example, 4) is less than (step S202).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S202: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203). Then, the CPU 101 acquires the values of various random numbers (big hit random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers) updated by the process of step S1 and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S204).

Here, various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 are stored in the RAM 103, so that the first special symbol relating to the reserved ball in which the reserved number U1 is increased in step S203. The right to judge will be withheld. Although the details will be described later, the reserved right of the first special symbol determination is digested in the special symbol processing in step S4, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped after a predetermined time elapses. The result of the first special symbol determination is notified.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 executes the pre-determination process based on various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in step S204 (step S205). The pre-judgment process of step S205 is a determination process for the reserved right of the first special symbol determination, and predetermines whether or not it is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol in the case of a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern, and the like, and shows the determination result. This is a process for generating determination information. After that, the CPU 101 sets the hold command including the pre-determination information in the RAM 103 (step S206). The hold command set in step S206 is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output process in step S9 of FIG. In the pre-determination process of step S205, various random numbers acquired in step S204 may be generated as pre-determination information as they are, and the pre-determination information may be included in the hold command.

If it is determined as "NO" in step S201, if it is determined as "NO" in step S202, or if the process of step S206 is executed, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S207. In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the second start port switch 112 is "ON" (whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 12). When it is determined that the second start port switch 112 is "ON" (step S207: YES), the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the RAM 103 is stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of reserved symbols Umax2 (for example, 4) is less than (step S208).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S208: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S209). Then, the CPU 101 acquires various random numbers (big hit random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers) updated in the process of step S1 and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S210).

Then, the CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process in the same manner as the process of step S205 using various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 by the process of step S210 (step S211), and sends a hold command including the pre-determination information to the RAM 103. Set (step S212).

When it is determined as "NO" in step S207, when it is determined as "NO" in step S208, or when the process of step S212 is performed, the CPU 101 ends the start port switch process and performs the gate switch process. Proceed to processing.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit 100]
FIG. 8 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S3 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 101 gates based on whether or not a detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 or 115 has become “ON”) is input. It is determined whether or not the switch 114 or 115 is “ON” (step S301).

When the CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 or 115 is "ON" (step S301: YES), the hold number G of the normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the maximum hold number Gmax of the normal symbol determination (for example,). 4) It is determined whether or not it is less than 4) (step S302).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number G is less than the maximum hold number Gmax (step S302: YES), the CPU 101 updates the hold number G to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S303), and is normally held by this process. An ordinary symbol random number used for symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM 103 (step S304). The normal symbol random number stored in step S304 may be subjected to pre-determination processing in the same manner as in step S205, and the result of the pre-determination processing may be transmitted to the effect control unit 130 as a hold command for the normal symbol. ..

[Special symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. FIG. 9 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S4 in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S408 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the special game is in progress (big hit game) based on, for example, the information stored in the RAM 103 (step S401). If it is determined that the special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the CPU 101 ends the special symbol processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the special game is not in progress (step S401: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is in variable display (step S402). When it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S403). ), When it is determined that the number is "1" or more (step S403: YES), the number of reserved balls U2 is subtracted by "1" to digest only 1 reserved ball (step S404).

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is not "1" or more (the second special symbol determination is not held) (step S403: NO), the hold number of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is held. When it is determined whether or not U1 is "1" or more (step S405) and it is determined that it is "1" or more (step S405: YES), the number of reserved balls U1 is subtracted by "1" to reduce the number of reserved balls to 1. Only digest (step S406). On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines in step S405 that the number of holds U1 is not "1" or more (step S405: NO), the CPU 101 sets the customer waiting command in the RAM 103 and ends the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

The CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process following the process of step S404 or step S406 (step S407). Hereinafter, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Big hit judgment process)
As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S431). Specifically, when the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot following the process of step S404 of FIG. 9, the jackpot random number (in step S2) related to the hold ball obtained by subtracting the hold number U2 in the process of step S404. It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102. As a result, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit. When the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the probability of being judged as a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state. On the other hand, when determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot following the process of step S406 of FIG. 9, the CPU 101 determines the jackpot random number related to the hold ball obtained by subtracting the hold number U1 in the process of step S406 (RAM 103 in the process of step S2). It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the ROM 102 matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in the ROM 102 in advance. As a result, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit.

Here, when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot (step S431: YES), the CPU 101 performs the symbol random number determination process based on the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 together with the jackpot random number described above. (Step S432). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines which of the random number values assigned to each of the jackpot symbols stored in advance in the ROM 102 matches the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. To determine the jackpot symbol. Then, the CPU 101 sets the determined jackpot symbol in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S433).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S431 that it is not a big hit (step S431: NO), the CPU 101 sets the lost symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is lost in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S434).

After the process of step S433 or the process of step S434, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot determination process and returns the process to the special symbol process of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 9, following the jackpot determination process in step S407, the CPU 101 executes the variation pattern setting process (step S408). Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation game flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability game state (step S461). When the probabilistic game flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the auxiliary game state (step S462). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF (step S462: NO), the CPU 101 sets a normal table in the RAM 103 as a variation pattern table (step S463). When the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S462: YES), the CPU 101 sets the time saving table in the RAM 103 as the variation pattern table (step S464).

On the other hand, when the probability variation game flag is ON (step S461: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation table in the RAM 103 as the variation pattern table (step S466).

The fluctuation pattern table is a table in which conditions for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are defined. Each fluctuation pattern table contains a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and when there is a loss and no reach (predetermined fluctuation time using a reach random number). Loss fluctuation pattern (without reach) selected when it is not decided to select a fluctuation pattern of (for example, 13 seconds) or more, and when there is a loss and reach (for example, a predetermined fluctuation time using a reach random number) The reach variation pattern to be selected is included when it is determined to select the variation pattern of 13 seconds) or more. For example, the jackpot fluctuation pattern included in the normal table includes fluctuation patterns such as 25 seconds, 60 seconds, 100 seconds, and 120 seconds, and the reach fluctuation pattern included in the normal table has a fluctuation time of 22 seconds. , 57 seconds, 92 seconds, 112 seconds and the like. Further, as the loss fluctuation pattern included in the normal table, there are fluctuation patterns such as a fluctuation time of 8 seconds and 12 seconds. Further, the time saving table and the probability variation table have a variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 2 seconds) shorter than the loss variation pattern in the normal table as the loss variation pattern. An example of the fluctuation pattern table of the normal table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18A to 18C.

Following the processing of step S463, step S464, or step S465, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466). If the result of the jackpot determination is not a loss, that is, if it is a jackpot (step S466: NO), the CPU 101 proceeds to the next step 468.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the CPU 101 performs the reach random number determination process (step S467). In the reach random number determination process, the CPU 101 determines whether or not to select a reach variation pattern having a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more based on the acquired reach random number. Then, the CPU 101 executes the process of step S468 following the process of step S467.

In step S468, the CPU 101 performs a variation pattern random number determination process. Specifically, the CPU 101 uses the set variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. More specifically, the CPU 101 determines a variation pattern in which the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 and the value set for each variation pattern included in the set variation pattern table match.

In this way, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern random number acquired in step S2 and the variation pattern table set in step S463, step S464, or step S465. The determined fluctuation pattern is set in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S469). After the process of step S469, the CPU 101 ends the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11 and proceeds with the processes after step S409 of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 9, following the process of step S408, the CPU 101 shows the symbol setting information set in the process of step S407, the setting information of the variation pattern set in the process of step S408, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A fluctuation start command including information and the like is generated and set in the RAM 103 (step S409). This variation start command is a command for instructing the execution of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Following the process of step S409, the CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S409 (step S410), and measures the variation time. Start (step S411). When the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, the variation display of the special symbol is performed using the second special symbol display 42, and the processing of step S406 is followed. If it is done, it is done using the first special symbol display 41.

When the CPU 101 determines "YES" in the process of step S402 or executes the process of step S411, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of step S408 from the start of measurement of the variation time in step S411. It is determined whether or not the time has passed (step S412).

When the CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), the CPU 101 sets a fluctuation stop command in the RAM 103 to notify that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped (step S413), and in the process of step S410. The variation display of the started special symbol is ended (step S414), and the measured variation time is reset (step S415). As a result, on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol determination is performed. The result will be notified. The fluctuation stop command set in the process of step S413 is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 of FIG.

After the process of step S415, the CPU 101 executes the stopped process (step S416). The details of the stopped processing will be described later.

If "YES" is determined in step S401, "NO" is determined in step S405, "NO" is determined in step S412, or the process of step S416 is performed, the CPU 101 determines. The special symbol processing is completed, and the normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG. 6 is executed.

[Processing during stop by game control unit 100]
Next, the stopped processing in step S416 of FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart showing the stopped processing of step S416 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 (step S480). Then, when the CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S480: YES), the CPU 101 sets the jackpot game flag stored in the RAM 103 to “ON” (step S481).

Following the process in step S481, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag and the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S482). Following the process of step S482, the CPU 101 starts the opening (step S483) and sets the opening command in the RAM 103 (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started and a jackpot effect during the jackpot game, and the command is the output process of step S9 in FIG. By being executed, it is transmitted to the effect control unit 130.

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485). When it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), the auxiliary game remaining number J stored in the RAM 103 is subtracted by "1" and the J is updated (step S486). .. The auxiliary game residual number J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols (the number of executions of the special symbol determination) for which the auxiliary game state is maintained, and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed. .. The details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the process of step S486, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487). When it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is not "0" (step S487: NO). ), The CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When it is determined that the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the high probability game residual number X stored in the RAM 103 and updates the X. (Step S490). The high-probability game residual number X indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is performed in the high-probability game state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

Following the process of step S490, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game residual number X is “0” (step S491). When it is determined that the high-probability game residual number X is "0" (step S491: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "OFF" (step S492).

When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or when the high probability game residual number X is " If it is determined that it is not "0" (step S491: NO), the CPU 101 ends the stopped processing of FIG. 12.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the details of the normal symbol processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S501). The auxiliary flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, and is a flag that indicates whether or not a hit game is in progress to operate the electric tulip 17. The electric tulip 17 operates in a predetermined pattern when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 differs depending on whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary gaming state (whether or not the auxiliary gaming flag is ON). When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 13.

When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 45 (step S502). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number G of the normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S503). When it is determined that the number of holds G is not "1" or more (step S503: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 13.

When the CPU 101 determines that the hold number G is "1" or more (step S503: YES), the CPU 101 updates the hold number G to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S504), and executes the normal symbol random number determination process. (Step S505). Specifically, the normal symbol random number acquired in the process of step S3 according to the game ball passing through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is the winning value of the normal symbol random number stored in the ROM 102. Based on whether or not it matches with, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S506). In addition, in the case of the auxiliary game state, more winning values of the normal symbol random numbers are set than in the case of the non-auxiliary game state, and in the case of the auxiliary game state, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit. The probability of becoming is higher than in the non-assisted game state.

When the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S506: NO), the CPU 101 sets the lost symbol in the RAM 103 (step S507).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S506: YES), the CPU 101 sets the winning symbol in the RAM 103 (step S508).

Following the process of step S507 or the process of step S508, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game state is in the auxiliary game state based on whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON (step S509).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary gaming state (step S509: NO), the CPU 101 sets the normal symbol fluctuation time, which is the time for variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45, to, for example, 25 seconds (step S510). On the contrary, when it is determined that the player is in the auxiliary gaming state (step S509: YES), the normal symbol variation time is set to a relatively short value, for example, 2 seconds (step S511). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S510 or step S511 is temporarily stored in the RAM 103.

Following the process of step S510 or step S511, the CPU 101 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 (step S512), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation display (step S513). ..

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol display 45 is in the process of displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (step S502: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbol (step S516). Specifically, the variation display of the normal symbol is based on whether or not the elapsed time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S513 reaches the normal symbol variation time set in the process of step S512 or step S513. Determine if the end timing has come. When it is determined that the end timing has not been reached (step S516: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 13.

When the CPU 101 determines that the end timing of the variation display of the normal symbol has come (step S516: YES), the CPU 101 ends the variation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 45 (step S517). Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to stop and display the symbol set in the process of step S507 or step S508. As a result, the result of the normal symbol determination is notified.

Following the process of step S517, the CPU 101 resets the elapsed time at which the measurement was started by the process of step S515 (step S518). Then, similarly to the above step S506, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S519), and if it is determined to be a hit (step S519: YES), the auxiliary flag is set to "ON". Set (step S520). This auxiliary flag is set to "ON", and the electric tulip processing described later is performed to operate the electric tulip 17.

When the process of step S520 is performed, when the process of step S516 determines NO, or when the process of step S519 determines NO, the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG. 13.

In the non-assisted game state, the second start opening 12 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 5.6 seconds) and the second starting port 12 is opened for a short time (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). There may be a hit.

[Large winning opening processing by the game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the details of the large winning opening processing executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart showing the large winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the special game flag (big hit game flag) is ON (step S601). When the special game flag is ON (step S601: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S602). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game started in step S483 is being opened.

If it is during the opening (step S602: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). The opening time varies depending on the jackpot symbol. If the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the CPU 101 sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and sets the value of Rmax. The opening pattern (opening time, number of times of opening, interval time, etc.) of the large winning opening 13 is set (step S604).

Here, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot symbol. Although the details will be described later, the number of rounds differs depending on the jackpot symbol, and the CPU 101 sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol.

Following step S604, the CPU 101 adds "1" to R and saves it in the RAM 103 (step S605). Next, the CPU 101 starts opening control of the large winning opening 13 based on the opening pattern set in step S604 (step S606), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the RAM 103 (step S607). After the process of step S607, the CPU 101 then executes the process of step S611.

On the other hand, if it is not during the opening (step S602: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (step S608). If the ending is in progress (step S608: YES), the CPU 101 then executes the process of step S617. If it is not during the ending (step S608: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is during the interval between the round games (step S609). If the interval is in progress (step S609: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S610), and if it has elapsed (step S610: YES), then performs the process of step S605. Run. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S610: NO), the CPU 101 ends the large winning opening process.

On the other hand, when it is not in the interval (step S609: NO), that is, when the round game is in progress, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S611). If the round end condition is not satisfied (step S611: NO), the CPU 101 ends the large winning opening process.

For example, the round end condition of the long open round game described later is that, for example, 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening control of the big winning opening of this round was started in step S606, or the big of this round in step S606. This means that the number of winnings in the large winning opening of the game ball after the opening control of the winning opening is started has reached a predetermined value. When any of these two conditions is satisfied, the CPU 101 determines that the round end condition is satisfied.

When the round end condition is satisfied (step S611: YES), the CPU 101 ends the opening control of the large winning opening in this round (step S612). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets a round end command (step S613). This round end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 determines whether or not R is equal to Rmax (step S614). That is, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S604.

If it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S614: NO), the CPU 101 starts measuring the interval time (step S615), and then ends the large winning opening process.

When it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S614: YES), the CPU 101 starts the ending (step S616) and sets the ending command in the RAM 103 (step S617).

When the processing of step S617 is performed, or when the CPU 101 determines YES in the processing of step S608, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S616 (step). S618). If the ending time has elapsed (step S618: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the special game this time is a jackpot game (step S619). When the jackpot game flag is ON, the CPU 101 executes the game state setting process (step S620). The details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S620 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S619, the CPU 101 sets the special game flag (big hit game flag) to OFF (step S621).

When NO is determined in the process of step S601, NO is determined in the process of step S611, NO is determined in the process of step S618, NO is determined in the process of step S610, NO is determined in the process of step S603. When the determination is made, the process of step S615 is executed, or the process of step S621 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the large winning opening process shown in FIG.

[Game state setting process by the game control unit 100]
Next, the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG. 14 will be described. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S620 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of jackpot this time is a high-probability jackpot accompanied by a transition to a high-probability gaming state (step S630). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a high-accuracy jackpot based on the symbol set in the jackpot determination process. When it is a high probability jackpot (step S630: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variation game flag to ON (step S631), and sets Xmax to the high probability game residual number X (step S632). Xmax is a predetermined value, and a very large value, for example, 10000 is set as Xmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set for X, the game is effectively controlled in a high-probability game state until the next big hit.

When the process of step S632 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S630, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot accompanied by a transition to the auxiliary gaming state (step S633). If YES is determined in step S633, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S634). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets the value of the auxiliary game residual number J according to the symbol set in the jackpot determination process (step S635).

When the process of step S635 is performed, or when NO is determined in step S633, the CPU 101 ends the game state setting process shown in FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the details of the electric tulip processing in step S7 of FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip processing of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701). When it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip processing.

When the CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S702). When it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not in operation (step S702: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the auxiliary game state by determining whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S703).

When the CPU 101 determines that it is not in the auxiliary gaming state (step S703: NO), for example, the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second starting port 12 for 0.1 second is performed once (step S704).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is in the auxiliary gaming state (step S703: YES), as an operation pattern of the electric tulip 17, for example, an operation pattern in which the operation of opening the second starting port 12 for 1.8 seconds is performed three times. It is set in the RAM 103 (step S705).

After setting the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 by the process of step S704 or step S705, the CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S706).

When the CPU 101 executes the process of step S706 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S702: YES), whether or not the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S706 is completed. (Step S707). When it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 is completed (step S707: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S708).

When NO is determined in the process of step S701, NO is determined in the process of step S707, or the process of step S708 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

Next, the jackpot symbol selected when the result of the special game determination is a jackpot will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a breakdown of jackpot symbols selected according to winning a prize at each starting port, and is a diagram showing the contents of a jackpot game corresponding to each symbol.

As shown in FIG. 17, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and becomes a big hit, one of the big hit symbols Z1 to the big hit symbol Z3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Then, a jackpot game (a kind of special game) is performed according to each jackpot symbol. When a game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 12 and becomes a big hit, any one of the big hit symbol Z4 to the big hit symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and each jackpot symbol is displayed. A jackpot game (a type of special game) is performed according to the game.

Specifically, when a jackpot is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected at a rate of 10% and the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected at a rate of 50%. , The jackpot symbol Z3 is selected at a rate of 40%.

When the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected, as a jackpot game, a predetermined round end condition (for example, until the number of winning balls to the jackpot 13 reaches 10 or after the jackpot 13 is opened. Until 29.5 seconds have passed), 10 long-open round games (10 rounds (denoted as "R")) in which the large winning opening 13 is opened are performed. For example, in a 10R jackpot game, about 1500 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed as a jackpot game. After the jackpot symbol Z1 or jackpot symbol Z2 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probability-changing gaming state (high-probability gaming state and auxiliary gaming state), and substantially until the next jackpot. The state continues.

The jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z1 is called "10R probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z2 is called "4R probability variation jackpot".

Further, when the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed. After the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected and the jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the low-probability gaming state and the auxiliary gaming state (time-saving gaming state). The time-saving gaming state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times, and when the 100th special symbol change is completed, the gaming machine 1 is returned to the normal gaming state. The jackpot by the jackpot symbol Z3 may be referred to as "4R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit based on the winning of the second starting port 12, the jackpot symbol Z4 is selected at a rate of 50%, the jackpot symbol Z5 is selected at a rate of 10%, and the jackpot symbol Z5 is selected at a rate of 40%. Symbol Z6 is selected.

When the jackpot symbol Z4 or Z5 is selected, the game shifts to the probability variation game state after the jackpot game. The probabilistic game state substantially continues until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol Z6 is selected, it shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game, and the time-saving game state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times.

The jackpot symbol Z4 is a symbol indicating the above-mentioned 10R probability variation jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 10R long open round game is performed. The jackpot symbol Z5 is a symbol indicating the above-mentioned 4R probability variation jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 4R long open round game is performed. Further, the jackpot symbol Z6 is a symbol indicating a 4R normal jackpot.

(Explanation of variable production and reach production)
Here, the variable effect and the reach effect will be described. The "variable effect" is an effect performed during the change of the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol), starts when the special symbol starts to change, and ends when the special symbol ends to change. It is a production. The variable effect includes an effect using a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, an effect using other images, an effect using sound output from the speaker 24, an effect using a movable accessory 7, and a board lamp. 25, an effect using the frame lamp 37, an effect using the effect button 26, and an effect using the effect lever 28 are included.

The "reach effect" is an effect using a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. Specifically, as will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 5 displays a decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and stops when the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. The decorative symbol is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. Depending on the stop mode of the decorative symbol, it is notified whether the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit or a loss. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 5 displays three decorative symbols, left, middle, and right. Each decorative pattern is, for example, an image including numbers from "1" to "9" and a character image corresponding to the numbers. When three decorative symbols start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and all three decorative symbols of the same type stop (for example, "777" or "444"), the jackpot is notified. .. The state in which three similar decorative patterns are aligned is called "doublet". On the other hand, if the three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned and stopped, the loss is notified. The reach production is a production that makes the player expect that three similar decorative patterns are aligned.

For example, the reach effect is an effect in which the same type of decorative symbol stops on the left and right and the decorative symbol fluctuates in the middle region, and the player is informed that the decorative symbol of the same type as the decorative symbol stopped on the left and right stops in the middle region. It is a production that makes you expect.

In the present embodiment, there are four types of reach effects: normal reach effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as "N reach"), SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, and full rotation reach. The N-reach production is the production with the lowest possibility of becoming a big hit (also called expectation or reliability) among a plurality of reach productions. For example, the expectation of N reach production is 0.1% or less. In the present embodiment, there are two N-reach effects, N-reach effects A and B, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each N-reach effect, and the effect time also differs. The longer the N reach production time, the higher the expectation.

The SP reach production is a production with a higher degree of expectation than the N reach production, and is a reach production having a longer production time than the N reach production. For example, the expectation of SP reach production is 5 to 10%. In the present embodiment, there are three SP reach effects A to C, and the expectation of the jackpot differs depending on each SP reach effect, and the effect time also differs. The longer the SP reach production time, the higher the expectation.

The SPSP reach production is a production with a higher degree of expectation than the SP reach production, and is a reach production having a longer production time than the SP reach production. For example, the expectation of SPSP reach production is 30 to 50%. In the present embodiment, there are three SPSP reach effects A to C, and the expectation of the jackpot differs depending on each SPSP reach effect, and the effect time also differs. The longer the production time of the SPSP reach production, the higher the expectation.

Full rotation reach is a reach production with 100% expectation (that is, a big hit is confirmed). The full rotation reach is, for example, an effect in which three decorative symbols of the same type are arranged in the horizontal direction and fluctuate in the vertical direction. For example, "333" as three decorative symbols moves from the upper area to the lower region of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and then "444" moves from the upper region to the lower region of the screen as three decorative symbols. In the full rotation reach, no matter what kind of decorative symbol is finally stopped, all three decorative symbols of the same type are stopped, and it becomes a big hit.

(Example of fluctuation pattern)
Next, an example of a fluctuation pattern table for selecting a fluctuation pattern will be described. 18A to 18C are diagrams showing an example of a variation pattern table used in, for example, a normal gaming state. FIG. 18A is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern table used for selecting a jackpot fluctuation pattern. FIG. 18B is a table used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is lost and the variation time of a predetermined time or longer is selected by using the reach random number, and the table is used to select the reach variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach variation pattern table used. FIG. 18C is a table used when it is determined that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the variation time equal to or longer than a predetermined time is not selected by using the reach random number, and the table is used to select the loss variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the loss variation pattern table used for.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the jackpot variation pattern table includes the jackpot variation pattern OP1-1 (variation time 20 seconds) and OP1-2 (variation time 25 seconds). The jackpot fluctuation patterns OP1-1 and OP1-2 are selected at a rate of 0.5%, respectively. When the jackpot variation pattern OP1-1 or OP1-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including a normal reach effect as a reach effect.

Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP1-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and then the same type of decorative symbols temporarily stop on the left and right to perform the normal reach effect A. Will be done.

When the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP1-2 is selected, three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and then the same type of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right to perform the normal reach effect B.

It should be noted that the pseudo-variable effect (pseudo-ream) may be performed before (or after) the N reach effect is started. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect in which three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-variated on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Temporary stop is a state in which the three decorative symbols do not stop completely but fluctuate (for example, swing up and down). When the three decorative patterns do not change again, it is sometimes called "pseudo-none". In addition, when three decorative symbols re-variate one or more times, the first re-variation is referred to as "pseudo 2", the second re-variation is referred to as "pseudo 3", and the third re-variation is referred to as "pseudo 4". There is. For example, one or a plurality of pseudo-variation effects (re-variations) may be performed before the reach is established (decorative symbols of the same type are stopped on the left and right), and then the N reach effect may be started. Further, the reach may be established without the pseudo-variation effect being performed, then one or a plurality of pseudo-variation effects may be performed, the reach may be established again, and the N reach effect may be started. Further, the pseudo-variation effect may be performed one or more times before the reach is established, then the reach may be established, and then the pseudo-variation effect may be performed one or more times, and the reach may be established again.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18A, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shows the jackpot fluctuation patterns OP2-1 (variation time 40 seconds), OP2-2 (variation time 50 seconds), and OP2-3 (variation time 60 seconds). ) And are included. The jackpot fluctuation patterns OP2-1, OP2-2, and OP2-3 are selected at a ratio of 1%, 3%, and 5%, respectively. When any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns OP2-1 to OP2-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect and an SP reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP2-1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, N reach effect is performed, and then SP reach effect A is performed. .. Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP2-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect B is performed. Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP2-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect C is performed.

Further, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table includes the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP3-1 (variation time 100 seconds), OP3-2 (variation time 110 seconds), and OP3-3 (variation time 120 seconds). The jackpot fluctuation patterns OP3-1, OP3-2, and OP3-3 are selected at a ratio of 10%, 15%, and 24%, respectively. When any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns OP3-1 to OP3-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect, an SP reach effect, and an SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP3-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. After that, SPSP reach production A is performed. Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP3-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. SPSP reach production B is performed. Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP3-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. SPSP reach production C is performed.

Further, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table includes the jackpot fluctuation patterns OP4-1 (variation time 80 seconds), OP4-2 (variation time 90 seconds), and OP4-3 (variation time 100 seconds). The jackpot fluctuation patterns OP4-1, OP4-2, and OP4-3 are selected at a ratio of 8%, 13%, and 18%, respectively. When any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns OP4-1 to OP4-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect and an SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP4-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach A effect is performed. .. Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP4-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect B is performed. Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP4-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect C is performed.

Further, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table includes the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP5 (variation time 150 seconds). The jackpot fluctuation pattern OP5 is selected at a rate of 1%. When the jackpot variation pattern OP5 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including a full rotation reach effect as a reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, the reach variation pattern table includes the reach variation pattern HP1-1 (variation time 17 seconds) and HP1-2 (variation time 22 seconds). The reach variation patterns HP1-1 and HP1-2 are selected at a rate of 30% and 20%, respectively. When the reach variation pattern HP1-1 or HP1-2 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including a normal reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the reach variation pattern HP1-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, and the normal reach effect A is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP1-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the normal reach effect B is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, the reach fluctuation pattern table shows the fluctuation patterns HP2-1 (variation time 37 seconds), HP2-2 (variation time 47 seconds), and HP2-3 (variation time 57 seconds). And are included. The reach variation patterns HP2-1, HP2-2, and HP2-3 are selected at a ratio of 10%, 8%, and 7%, respectively. When any of the reach variation patterns HP2-1 to HP2-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect and an SP reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the reach fluctuation pattern HP2-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect A is performed. .. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP2-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect B is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP2-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect C is performed.

The reach variation pattern table includes a reach variation pattern HP3-1 (variation time 92 seconds), HP3-2 (variation time 102 seconds), and HP3-3 (variation time 112 seconds). The reach variation patterns HP3-1, HP3-2, and HP3-3 are selected at a ratio of 5%, 3%, and 2%, respectively. When any of the reach variation patterns HP3-1 to HP3-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs a variation effect including an N reach effect, an SP reach effect, and an SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the reach fluctuation pattern HP3-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. After that, SPSP reach production A is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP3-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. SPSP reach production B is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP3-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. SPSP reach production C is performed.

Further, the reach variation pattern table includes reach variation patterns HP4-1 (variation time 72 seconds), HP4-2 (variation time 82 seconds), and HP4-3 (variation time 92 seconds). The reach variation patterns HP4-1, HP4-2, and HP4-3 are selected at a ratio of 7%, 5%, and 3%, respectively. When any of the reach variation patterns HP4-1 to HP4-3 is selected, the effect control unit 130 performs an N reach effect and a variation effect including the SPSP reach effect as the reach effect.

Specifically, when the reach variation pattern HP4-1 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect A is performed. .. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect B is performed. Further, when the reach variation pattern HP4-3 is selected, the three decorative symbols start to vary according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect C is performed.

The reach variation pattern table does not include the variation pattern (OP5 above) in which full rotation reach is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, the loss fluctuation pattern table includes the loss fluctuation pattern HP5-1 (variation time 8 seconds) selected when the number of pending first special symbol determinations (U1) is 2 or less. , HP5-2 (variation time 12 seconds) and. When the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and there is no reach (when it is not determined to select a variation pattern of a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more using the reach random number), the loss variation pattern HP5- 1 is selected with an 80% probability, and the loss variation pattern HP5-2 is selected with a 20% probability. Further, the loss variation pattern table includes the loss variation pattern HP5-3 (variation time 3 seconds) selected when the number of pending first special symbol determinations (U1) is 3 or more. When the number of holdings is 3 or more, the loss fluctuation pattern HP5-3 is selected at a rate of 100%.

As described above, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, the SPSP reach effect is likely to be performed, and the N reach effect is difficult to be performed. Further, when it is determined that there is a loss, it is difficult to perform the SPSP reach effect, and it is easy to perform the N reach effect. Therefore, when the SPSP reach effect is performed, the possibility of a big hit after that is relatively high, and when the N reach effect is performed, the possibility of a big hit after that is relatively low.

Further, regarding a plurality of SP reach effects, in the case of a big hit, the SP reach effects C, B, and A are likely to be executed in this order, and in the case of a loss, the SP reach effects A, B, and C are likely to be executed in this order. There is. Therefore, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of SP reach productions A, B, and C. Further, regarding a plurality of SPSP reach effects, in the case of a big hit, the SPSP reach effects C, B, and A are likely to be executed in this order, and in the case of a loss, the SPSP reach effects A, B, and C are likely to be executed in this order. There is. Therefore, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of SPSP reach productions A, B, and C.

In addition to the fluctuation patterns (variation times) shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, there may be a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation times) of the special symbols. For example, for each of the above reach effects, there may be a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream and a variation pattern not including a pseudo-ream. In this case, the selection rate of each fluctuation pattern is set so that the higher the number of pseudo-reams (the number of re-variations), the higher the expectation of the jackpot. For example, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach effect A, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach effect B, a variation pattern including pseudo 2 and SP reach effect C, and pseudo 3 and SP reach effect A. There may be a variation pattern including a variation pattern including the pseudo 3 and the SP reach effect B, and a variation pattern including the pseudo 3 and the SP reach effect C. Further, a variation pattern including the pseudo 2 and the SPSP reach effect A, a variation pattern including the pseudo 2 and the SPSP reach effect B, a variation pattern including the pseudo 2 and the SPSP reach effect C, and a pseudo 3 and the SPSP reach effect A are included. There may be a variation pattern including a variation pattern including the pseudo 3 and the SPSP reach effect B, and a variation pattern including the pseudo 3 and the SPSP reach effect C.

Further, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern, there may be a fluctuation pattern in which the SPSP reach effect that does not include the N reach effect and the SP reach effect is performed. Further, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, there may be a fluctuation pattern in which none of the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect is performed. When such a fluctuation pattern is selected, a big hit is suddenly notified without performing a reach effect.

(Production in gaming machine 1 of this embodiment)
Next, the outline of the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

(Direction by loss fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the variation of the special symbol when the loss variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the flow of the effect performed accordingly. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a specific example of the effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 5 when the loss variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The decorative symbol 51 includes a left decorative symbol 51a in the left region, a medium decorative symbol 51b in the middle region, and a right decorative symbol 51c in the right region. Each of the decorative symbols 51a, 51b, and 51c is a numerical image (for example, "2" of the left decorative symbol) and a predetermined image corresponding to the number (for example, an image of a character or an image of a specific person, which is not shown). Is a combination of and. Further, a normal background image is displayed as a background image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The background image is an image that becomes the background of the image displayed on the screen, and is arranged in the innermost layer of the screen. Images other than the background image (for example, decorative symbol 51, hold display, fourth symbol, etc.) are arranged on a layer on the front side of the background image. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the images are managed by a plurality of layers, and the images arranged on the front layer are preferentially displayed on the screen. Further, the hold display 52 is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The hold display 52 is an image showing the hold of the right to determine the special symbol, and for example, up to four images are displayed as an image showing the hold of the first special symbol determination. FIG. 20A shows a state in which three first special symbol determinations are held, and the hold display 521, the hold display 522, and the hold display 523 are displayed. In addition, the changing display 53 indicating the change of the current special symbol is displayed on the right side of the hold display 521. The changing display 53 is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the change of the current special symbol.

Further, for example, the fourth symbol 55 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. The fourth symbol 55 is a symbol for effect that fluctuates according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and stops according to the stop of the first special symbol. The fourth symbol 55 is assumed to be a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, but a fourth symbol (not shown) corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed on the screen.

If the game ball wins, for example, the first starting port 11 while the special symbol is changing, the right to determine the special symbol is reserved. When the right to determine the special symbol is reserved, the hold display 52 is additionally displayed. At the time of winning the first starting port 11, it is determined in advance whether or not it is a big hit. Based on the result of this preliminary determination, the display mode of the hold display 52 additionally displayed may be displayed in a display mode different from the usual display mode. For example, the display mode of the hold display 52 includes white, blue, green, red, and gold, and is usually displayed as "white". The hold display 52 shows the display mode of the hold display 52 so that the degree of expectation (the possibility of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol determination related to the hold display 52) increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and gold. Is determined. For example, the expectation of "blue" on the hold display 52 is 3%, the expectation of "green" is 15%, the expectation of "red" is 35%, and the expectation of "gold" is 65. May be%.

When the hold display 52 is additionally displayed, a predetermined winning sound may be output from the speaker 24. For example, when the hold display 52 is displayed in the normal "white", the first winning sound is output, and when the hold display 52 is displayed in "blue", the second winning sound is output. When the hold display 52 is displayed in "green", the third winning sound may be output. Further, when the hold display 52 is displayed in "red", the fourth winning sound may be output, and when the holding display 52 is displayed in "gold", the fifth winning sound may be output. .. When the second winning sound to the fifth winning sound indicating that the expectation of the hold display 52 is higher than usual is output, it may be output at a louder volume than the first winning sound.

Further, when the hold display 52 is displayed in the normal "white", the winning sound is not output, and when it is displayed in a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal "white", it depends on the display mode. Different winning sounds may be output. Further, the display mode of the hold display 52 changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of display modes not only at the time of winning the starting port but also after the winning of the starting port and in the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol, and the display mode is changed. The winning sound may be output when the value is changed.

For example, the hold display 52 is additionally displayed in normal "white" according to the winning of the starting port, and the hold display 52 of "white" changes to "blue" during the change of the next and subsequent special symbols. May be good. Such an effect of changing the hold display 52 is called a "hold change effect". When the hold change effect is executed, a sound corresponding to the changing color of the hold display 52 (the same sound as the above-mentioned winning sound) is output. When the hold change effect is executed, a sound different from the above-mentioned winning sound may be output. Further, the hold change effect may be performed a plurality of times with respect to the hold display 52 of 1. For example, the hold display 52 may be displayed in "white" at the time of winning, then change to "blue", then change to "green", and then change to "red". Further, the hold change effect may be performed a plurality of times during one change of the special symbol, or may be performed a plurality of times during the change of the plurality of special symbols.

Further, during the change of the special symbol, the changing display 53 corresponding to the change may be changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation. The effect of changing the changing display 53 is called "changing display changing effect". When the changing display change effect is executed, a sound corresponding to the color of the changing changing display 53 (the same sound as the above-mentioned winning sound) is output. When the display change effect during fluctuation is executed, a sound different from the above-mentioned winning sound may be output. Further, the display change effect during the change may be performed a plurality of times during the change of the special symbol.

Here, when the changing display 53 is in a predetermined display mode (for example, red), for example, an SPSP reach effect (an effect having a higher expectation than the SP reach effect) may be executed with a 100% probability in the variation. .. In this case, when the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode, a suggestion effect suggesting that the SPSP reach effect is performed may be performed. For example, an image described as "SPSP reach!" May be displayed as a suggestion effect. Even when the SPSP reach effect is performed, the suggestion effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, when the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode (when changing to a predetermined display mode after the start of the current fluctuation, or when changing to a predetermined display mode before the start of the current fluctuation). ), The SPSP reach effect is performed regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. When the changing display 53 changes to a predetermined display mode, the SPSP reach effect may be executed with a probability of 80% instead of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 19, for example, when the first special symbol display 41 (may be the second special symbol display 42) starts to fluctuate the first special symbol (time point T0), the start effect is performed. For example, as a start effect, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), an effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols 51 that have been stopped and displayed start moving to the lower part of the screen. Further, as a start effect, the changing display 53 is erased, and the hold displays 521 to 523 are shifted to the right. The rightmost hold display 521 is displayed as the changing display 53. In the start effect, the three decorative symbols 51 may start moving at the same time, or each decorative symbol may start moving in order (for example, in the order of left, right, and middle). Further, in the start effect, each decorative symbol may operate in a different operation mode. For example, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol may move upward and then downward, while the intermediate decorative symbol may move downward without moving upward. In addition, the fourth symbol 55 also starts to fluctuate according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

After the start effect is performed, high-speed fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbol 51 is fluctuated at high speed (FIGS. 19 and 20 (C)). After the high-speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds), the stop effect is performed. For example, as a stop effect, the left decorative symbol 51a moves from the top to the bottom at a low speed and temporarily stops in the left region (FIG. 20 (D)), and then the right decorative symbol 51c moves from the top to the bottom at a low speed. Temporarily stops in the right region (FIG. 20 (E)), and then the intermediate decorative symbol 51b moves from above to downward at a low speed to temporarily stop in the middle region (FIG. 20 (F)). Then, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 20 (G)), and at the time point T1 when the variation time (for example, 12 seconds) of the special symbol elapses from the time point T0, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to the stop display, the three decorative symbols 51 display a stop (completely stopped, referred to as "main stop") (FIG. 20 (H)). In addition, the fourth symbol 55 is also stopped and displayed according to the stop display of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 19, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol determination held at the time point T2 (FIG. 20 (A)). (Special symbol determination) related to the hold display 522 of the above is performed, and the change of the special symbol is started. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 5, the start effect and the high-speed fluctuation are performed in the same manner as described above, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time T3 when the fluctuation time (for example, 8 seconds) of the special symbol elapses from the time point T2. The decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed in response to the stop of displaying the special symbol. Further, when the predetermined stop display period elapses, the reserved special symbol determination (special symbol determination according to the hold display 523 of FIG. 20A) is performed at the time point T4, and the start effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 19, a predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 24 during the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, in the case of the loss fluctuation pattern, the BGM 1 is output from the speaker 24.

BGM1 is a sound output by reproducing predetermined acoustic data (for example, a file in wav format). BGM1 is, for example, a part of a predetermined musical piece (for example, a prelude part of the musical piece). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine with a motif of a specific singer that actually exists, and a music of a specific singer is used as a music corresponding to BGM1.

BGM1 is a musical piece having a predetermined playback time. For example, BGM1 has a reproduction time longer than the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation pattern (for example, 15 seconds) or a reproduction time shorter than the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation pattern (for example, 3 seconds).

In the state where the BGM1 is not output, the BGM1 is started to be reproduced from the beginning in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output even during the stop display period of the special symbol. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed from the stop of the special symbol when the special symbol determination is not held, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs the customer waiting effect. In the customer waiting effect, the liquid crystal display device 5 displays a moving image or a still image, but the BGM 1 is not output. When the variation of the special symbol is started during the customer waiting effect, the variation effect using the decorative symbol 51 is started in the liquid crystal display device 5, and the BGM1 is started to be reproduced from the beginning. During the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect ends in response to the player holding the handle 20 (or in response to turning the lever 21), and the decorative symbol 51 stops on the liquid crystal display device 5. The displayed image may be displayed and the reproduction of the BGM1 may be started.

When the reproduction of the BGM1 is started in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in this way, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output during the fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, even after the special symbol is stopped, the BGM1 is continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) elapses. When a loss variation pattern is selected when a plurality of special symbol determinations are held, the special symbol is repeatedly changed and stopped. The BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output while the special symbol is repeatedly changed and stopped. When the reproduction of the BGM1 is completed (when the reproduction position of the BGM1 is at the end), the BGM1 is restarted from the beginning.

The horizontal arrow of BGM1 in FIG. 19 indicates that the reproduction and output of BGM1 are continued while the variation of the plurality of special symbols is performed. The BGM1 having a reproduction time shorter than the period in which the variation of the plurality of special symbols is performed may be repeatedly reproduced. Further, the BGM1 having a reproduction time longer than this period may be reproduced and output.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment stores a plurality of songs (for example, eight songs A to H) as songs of a specific singer. In the present embodiment, for example, there are eight production modes (stages) in the normal gaming state (normal mode), one of the eight production modes is selected, and the variable production is performed in any of the production modes. Is done. For example, if the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times after the effect mode changes, a lottery for whether or not to change the effect mode at the start of the change of the next special symbol is performed in the effect control unit 130, and it is determined that the effect mode is changed. If so, one of the eight production modes is selected by lottery. A different background image is displayed for each production mode (stage), and different types of music are output while the special symbol is changing. That is, the type of the BGM1 output during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the loss fluctuation pattern differs depending on the effect mode. For example, in the effect mode A (stage A), the background image A for the stage A is displayed, and in this stage A, BGM_A1 is reproduced and output as a part of the music A. Further, when the production mode A (stage A) is switched to the production mode B (stage B), the background image B for the stage B is displayed, and in this stage B, BGM_B1 is played as a part of the music B. Is output. Further, in the probabilistic game state, there is an effect mode (stage in the probabilistic game mode) in the probabilistic game state, a different background image is displayed for each effect mode, and different types of music are output while the special symbol is changed.

In addition, if the reach effect is performed during the change of the special symbol and the result is lost, in the next change of the special symbol, the playback position of BGM1 (elapsed time from the beginning) is in the middle of the change of the immediately preceding special symbol. Even if there is, BGM1 may be reproduced from the beginning. Further, when the change of the special symbol based on the loss fluctuation pattern is repeatedly performed, the BGM1 may be reproduced from the beginning for each change of the special symbol.

Here, the composition of the music will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the composition of music used in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 21, the music is composed of, for example, five parts of BGM 1-5. Each piece of music is divided into, for example, five parts as shown in FIG. For example, the music A is divided into BGM_A1, BGM_A2, BGM_A3, BGM_A4, and BGM_A5. Further, the music B is divided into BGM_B1, BGM_B2, BGM_B3, BGM_B4, and BGM_B5. The music C is also divided into BGM_C1-5. Below, of the five parts of each song, the first part is "BGM1", the second part is "BGM2", the third part is "BGM3", the fourth part is "BGM4", and the fifth part. The part of is written as "BGM5".

For example, BGM1 may be an introduction part (prelude part) of a specific music piece. Further, BGM1 may be music that repeats the same or similar rhythm. This BGM1 is repeatedly output while the effect of the loss variation pattern shown in FIG. 19 is being performed. Details will be described later, but this BGM1 is output during the pre-reach production.

BGM2 is a part of a specific musical piece following BGM1. For example, BGM2 may be a portion following the prelude portion of a specific musical piece. BGM2 may be reproduced from the end of BGM1, or BGM2 may be reproduced from the middle of BGM1. Since the BGM1 is a repetition of a predetermined rhythm, there is no sense of discomfort even if the BGM2 is reproduced from the end of the BGM1 or the BGM2 is reproduced from the middle of the BGM1. BGM1 and BGM2 do not necessarily have to have such a configuration. BGM1 does not have to be a repetition of a predetermined rhythm. Details will be described later, but this BGM2 is output during the N reach production.

BGM3 is a part of a specific musical piece following BGM2. For example, BGM3 may be a melody part of a specific musical piece. Details will be described later, but this BGM3 is output during the SP reach production.

BGM4 is a part of a specific musical piece following BGM3. For example, BGM4 may be a chorus part of a specific musical piece. The BGM4 has a predetermined playback time, and the playback time differs depending on the type of music (for example, 45 seconds, 55 seconds, 65 seconds, etc.). Although the details will be described later, this BGM4 is output during the SPSP reach production.

In addition, BGM5 is a part of a specific musical piece following BGM4. For example, BGM5 may be the last chorus part of a particular piece of music.

The music is not limited to five parts, and may be divided into six or more parts, or may be divided into four or less parts.

(Direction by jackpot fluctuation pattern or reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the effect when the jackpot fluctuation pattern or the reach fluctuation pattern is selected will be described.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flow of variation and variation effect of a special symbol when a jackpot variation pattern or a reach variation pattern is selected.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (1), when any of the fluctuation patterns OP1-1 and OP1-2 (FIG. 18A), the fluctuation patterns HP1-1 and HP1-2 (FIG. 18B) is selected, N Variable production including reach production is performed. Specifically, a pre-reach effect is performed according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. The pre-reach production is a production before the reach production is performed. In this pre-reach effect, for example, a start effect in which the decorative symbol 51 starts to fluctuate is performed, a notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit is performed, and a pseudo-variation effect in which the decorative symbol 51 is re-variated is performed. You may do it. After the pre-reach effect is performed, the reach is established and the N reach effect (A or B) is performed. Then, as a result of the N reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three decorative symbols of the same type are aligned is performed. Further, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed in which three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned. Then, depending on the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (a mode in which three decorative symbols of the same type are aligned) or a loss mode (a mode in which three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned). This stop).

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (2), when any of the fluctuation patterns OP2-1 to OP2-3 (FIG. 18A) and the fluctuation patterns HP2-1 to HP2-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected, the SP Variable production including reach production is performed. Specifically, a pre-reach effect is performed according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and then an N reach effect (A or B) is performed. At the end of the N reach production, the SP development production indicating that the SP reach production develops is performed, and the SP reach production (any of A to C) is started. Then, as a result of the SP reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three decorative symbols of the same type are aligned is performed. Further, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed in which three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned. Then, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed in response to the stop display of the special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), when any of the fluctuation patterns OP3-1 to OP3-3 (FIG. 18A) and the fluctuation patterns HP3-1 to HP3-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected. , SP reach effect and variable effect including SPSP reach effect are performed. Specifically, a pre-reach effect is performed according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and then an N reach effect (A or B) is performed. At the end of the N reach production, the SP development production indicating that the SP reach production develops is performed, and the SP reach production (any of A to C) is started. Next, at the final stage of the SP reach effect, the SPSP development effect indicating that the SPSP reach effect is further developed is performed, and the SPSP reach effect (any of A to C) is started. Then, as a result of the SPSP reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three decorative symbols of the same type are aligned is performed. Further, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed in which three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned. Then, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed in response to the stop display of the special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), when any of the fluctuation patterns OP4-1 to OP4-3 (FIG. 18A) and the fluctuation patterns HP4-1 to HP4-3 (FIG. 18B) is selected. , SPSP reach effects and other variable effects are performed. Specifically, a pre-reach effect is performed according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and then an N reach effect (A or B) is performed. At the end of the N reach production, the SPSP development production indicating that the SPSP reach production develops is performed, and the SPSP reach production (any of A to C) is started. Then, as a result of the SPSP reach effect, a winning notification effect indicating the result of the special symbol determination is performed. If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a jackpot notification effect in which three decorative symbols of the same type are aligned is performed. Further, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed in which three decorative symbols of the same type are not aligned. Then, the decorative symbol 51 is stopped and displayed in response to the stop display of the special symbol. The SPSP development effect suggesting the development from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect in FIG. 22 (4) is the same as the SPSP development effect suggesting the development from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect in FIG. 22 (3). It may be a production or a different production.

(Reach production and BGM control)
Next, control of the BGM and a specific example of the effect when the effect according to each effect pattern shown in FIG. 22 is performed will be described. The control of BGM during the reach production will be described.

((Control of BGM in the production pattern of FIG. 22 (1)))
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the N reach effect is performed. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss and the effect according to the effect pattern of FIG. 23 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 23, the pre-reach effect is performed according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol at the time point T0. Specifically, as a pre-reach effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), the three decorative symbols 51 start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed (FIG. 24 (B)). After that, the left decorative symbol 51a slowly moves from the upper side of the screen and temporarily stops in the left area (FIG. 24 (C)), and then the right decorative symbol 51c of the same type as the left decorative symbol 51a is placed on the screen. It slowly moves from the direction and temporarily stops in the right region (FIG. 24 (D)).

In the pre-reach effect, the BGM 1 is output from the speaker 24. That is, during the pre-reach effect, the same BGM1 as when the effect based on the loss variation pattern is performed as described with reference to FIG. 19 is continuously output. In the pre-reach effect, the pseudo-variation effect may be performed as described above.

When the right decorative symbol 51c of the same type as the left decorative symbol 51a is temporarily stopped, reach is established (point T1 in FIG. 23, FIG. 24 (E)). When the reach is established, the reach establishment sound indicating that the reach is established is output from the speaker 24. As shown in FIG. 23, the BGM1 stops almost at the same time when the reach establishment sound is output. While the reach establishment sound is output, neither BGM1 nor BGM2 is output. Further, when the reach is established, a linear image connecting the three decorative symbols 51 indicating that the reach is established is displayed. Further, when the reach is established, for example, a character image of "reach!" May be displayed (FIG. 24 (E)).

After the reach is established, the N reach effect is performed (FIG. 24 (F)). When the N reach effect is performed, BGM2 is output. For example, after the output of the reach establishment sound is completed, the output of the BGM2 is started. The output of the BGM 2 may be started while the reach establishment sound is being output. For example, at the same time that the reach establishment sound is started to be output, BGM1 may be stopped and BGM2 may be started to be output. Further, the BGM1 may be stopped first, the reach establishment sound may be output according to the reach establishment (display of the linear image in FIG. 24 (E)), and the output of the BGM2 may be started during the output of the reach establishment sound. .. In this case, the volume of the BGM 2 may be controlled to gradually increase. For example, BGM2 starts to be output at a relatively low volume during the output of the reach establishment sound, the volume of the BGM2 gradually increases until the output of the reach establishment sound ends, and the volume of the BGM2 usually increases at the end of the output of the reach establishment sound. The normal volume may be maintained during the subsequent N reach production.

After the reach is established, the N reach effect is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). During the N reach effect, a normal background image is displayed as a background image, and a state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 51b fluctuates is displayed. For example, the intermediate decorative symbol 51b slowly moves from the upper part of the screen, and an effect is performed in which it is expected that decorative symbols of the same type as those on the left and right will stop in the intermediate region. During this time, as shown in FIG. 23, BGM2 is continuously output.

Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the intermediate decorative symbol 51b different from the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stops in the middle region at the time point T2, and the loss is notified (FIG. 24 (G)). BGM2 stops almost at the same time when the intermediate decorative symbol 51b stops in the middle region (T2 in FIG. 23 (B)).

If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the intermediate decorative symbol 51b of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stops in the middle region at the time point T2, and the jackpot is notified (not shown). BGM2 stops almost at the same time when the intermediate decorative symbol 51b temporarily stops in the middle region (T2 in FIG. 23 (A)). The probability that the jackpot notification effect will be performed from the N reach effect is extremely low, for example, 1/1000 or less. When the jackpot notification effect is performed, the decorative symbols 51b of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area, and then the three decorative symbols 51 of the same type are temporarily stopped (doublet) to highlight the decorative symbols. Is done. For example, as a highlighting of a decorative symbol, the three decorative symbols 51 shine, or an effect is applied to the three decorative symbols 51. Then, after the highlighting of the decorative symbol is completed, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), and then the three decorative symbols 51 are transferred according to the stop of the special symbol. Stop.

When the result of the special symbol determination is lost, the three decorative symbols 51 remain temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the intermediate decorative symbol 51b different from the left and right decorative symbols is stopped. If the result of the special symbol determination is lost, the decorative symbol is not highlighted. After that, the three decorative symbols 51 are finally stopped according to the stop display of the special symbol (FIG. 24 (H)). During this time, BGM2 remains stationary.

If the right to judge the special symbol is reserved, the next special symbol will start to change when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. .. At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. If the right to determine the special symbol is not reserved, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and after that, when the game ball wins the start opening, the next The change of the special symbol of is started. In this case as well, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning.

That is, when the loss is notified without the reach effect being performed, the BGM1 is continuously output even during the stop display period of the special symbol, and from the beginning of the BGM1 at the start of the change of the next special symbol, as described above. The reproduction is not started, and the change of the next special symbol is started at the position in the middle of the BGM1 (the position between the beginning and the end in the reproduction time). On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed and the loss is notified, the reproduction is started from the beginning of the BGM1 at the start of the fluctuation of the next special symbol.

After the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is temporarily stopped at the time point T2, the output of the BGM1 may be started during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. When the BGM1 is output during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51, the BGM1 may be reproduced from the position where the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped (elapsed time from the beginning) at the time point T1.

((Control of BGM in the production pattern of FIG. 22 (2)))
Next, the control of BGM when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. FIG. 25 (A) is an effect pattern when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, and FIG. 25 (B) is an effect pattern when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. Further, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. FIG. 27 is an example of a screen view following FIG. 26, and is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

Similar to FIG. 23, the special symbol starts to fluctuate at the time point T0, the pre-reach effect is performed, and the reach is established at the time point T1 (FIGS. 25, 26 (A) to 26 (E)). It should be noted that the pseudo-variation effect may be performed a predetermined number of times until the reach is established. When the reach is established, the N reach production is performed. It should be noted that the pseudo-variation effect may be performed before the reach is established, or the pseudo-variation effect may be performed during the N reach effect after the reach is established, and the reach may be established again. For example, the "NEXT" symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol indicating the pseudo-variable effect) indicating that the pseudo-variable effect is performed after the decorative symbols of different types (or the same type) are temporarily stopped on the left and right is provisionally set as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b. After being stopped, a pseudo-variation effect in which the three decorative symbols 51 re-variate may be performed. When the pseudo-variation effect is performed, the BGM1 may be continuously output, or may be output from the beginning of the BGM1 each time the pseudo-variation is started, or the pseudo-variation effect may be output while the pseudo-variation effect is being performed. A BGM for variable production may be output.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when a pseudo-variation effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), each time the pseudo-variation effect is performed, the image may be reproduced from the beginning of the BGM1. For example, when three pseudo-variations are performed (when the "NEXT" symbol is stopped twice and re-variations are performed twice), the special symbol is reproduced from the beginning of BGM1 at the variation start time T0 of the special symbol, and the pseudo 1 Pseudo-variation is performed. Next, the "NEXT" symbol temporarily stops in the middle region, and pseudo-variation of pseudo 2 is performed. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the BGM1 being played is stopped and a pseudo-variation effect sound indicating a pseudo-variation effect is output. The timing at which the BGM 1 being reproduced may be stopped may not be the timing at which the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, but the timing at which the pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo 2 starts after the "NEXT" symbol is stopped. BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning according to the start of the pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo 2. That is, when the pseudo-variation of the pseudo 1 ends, the BGM 1 being reproduced is stopped in the middle, and the BGM 1 is reproduced from the beginning according to the start of the pseudo-variation of the pseudo 2. Further, the "NEXT" symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle region to perform pseudo-variation of pseudo-3, and BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning in response to the start of pseudo-variation of pseudo-3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, when the pseudo-variation effect is performed, the BGM1 may be reproduced so as to straddle the start time point of each pseudo-variation. For example, when pseudo 1, pseudo 2, and pseudo 3 are performed between time points T0 to T1, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning at the start time point T0 of pseudo 1, pseudo 2 is started at a position in the middle of BGM1, and then pseudo 2 is started. , Pseudo 3 may be started at a position in the middle of BGM1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), when the pseudo-variation effect is performed, BGM1 is output in the pseudo-variation of pseudo 1, and when the "NEXT" symbol stops in the middle region, BGM1 stops and the pseudo-variation occurs. The production sound is output. The timing at which the BGM 1 being reproduced may be stopped may not be the timing at which the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, but the timing at which the pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo 2 starts after the "NEXT" symbol is stopped. When the pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo 2 is started, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo series is reproduced from the beginning. Further, when the pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo 3 is started, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo series may be reproduced from the beginning. Further, the BGM dedicated to the pseudo-ream may be output so as to straddle the pseudo-variation start time of the pseudo-3. That is, in the pseudo fluctuation of pseudo 1, BGM1 is output, and in response to the start of pseudo fluctuation of pseudo 2, the BGM dedicated to pseudo-ream is reproduced from the beginning, and then, in the middle of the BGM dedicated to pseudo-ream, pseudo-ream is simulated. The pseudo-variation of 3 may be started.

Returning to FIGS. 25 and 26, as in FIG. 23, BGM1 is output during the pre-reach effect, a reach establishment sound is output when the reach is established, BGM1 is stopped, and BGM2 is output according to the start of the N reach effect. It is output (Fig. 25). During the N reach effect, as in FIG. 23, the intermediate decorative symbol 51b slowly moves from the upper part of the screen, and the same type of decorative symbol as the left and right is expected to stop (FIG. 26 (F)). ..

At the end of the N reach effect, for example, a decorative symbol (“7” symbol) different from the left and right decorative symbols slowly moves from the top to the bottom, and the effect is performed as if it stops in the middle region. Then, the effect of passing the "7" symbol through the middle region without stopping (or temporarily stopping) in the middle region is performed (point T2 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (G)). Then, an SP development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is developed is performed (points T2 to T3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (H)). When the SP development production is started, the SP development sound is output.

In the SP development effect, for example, the left decorative symbol 51a moves to the upper left of the screen while shrinking, and the right decorative symbol 51c moves to the upper right of the screen while shrinking (FIG. 26 (H)). At this time, the image of the character as a part of the left decorative symbol 51a is separated from the image of the numbers, and only the image of the numbers is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The same applies to the right decorative symbol 51c. When the N reach effect is developed into the SP reach effect in this way, the decorativeness (size, presence / absence of characters) of the decorative pattern 51 is reduced. Further, in the SP development effect, a background switching effect in which the background image is switched is performed. Specifically, the normal background image is switched to the SP background image for SP reach effect. During the SP reach effect, the SP background image is displayed as the background image.

Here, the display mode of the decorative design during each production will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the decorative symbol during each effect. As shown in FIG. 30, while the special symbol is stopped and displayed, each decorative symbol 51 is displayed in a mode including a numerical image (for example, "1" to "9") and a character image (or a photograph of a person). Then, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, a state in which a relatively large decorative symbol including the numerical image and the character image starts to fluctuate is displayed. Further, even during the pre-reach effect and the N-reach effect, a relatively large decorative pattern including a numerical image and a character image is displayed. When a big hit or a loss is notified as a result of the N reach effect, three relatively large decorative symbols including a number image and a character image are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped according to the stop of the special symbol. This stop. On the other hand, during the SP reach effect, a relatively small decorative pattern including a numerical image and not a character image is displayed (see FIG. 27 (I)). Further, even during the SPSP reach effect, a relatively small decorative pattern including a numerical image and not a character image is displayed. In addition, in the case of a big hit or a loss through the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, a relatively large decorative symbol including a numerical image and a character image is displayed at the time of temporarily stopping the three decorative symbols, and the special symbol is displayed. At the time of stop display, the three decorative symbols are finally stopped (see FIGS. 27 (M) (N) and 28 (L) (M)). In the case of a big hit through the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol including a numerical image and not a character image is displayed, and the special symbol is stopped. At the time of display, if the three decorative symbols (relatively large decorative symbols including the numerical image and not the character image) are stopped, the three decorations are lost through the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. When the symbol is temporarily stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol including the numerical image and the character image is displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols (relatively large decorative symbol including the numerical image and the character image) are displayed. May stop.

Here, the decorative symbol of the aspect including the numerical image and the character image is referred to as "the decorative symbol of the first aspect", and the decorative symbol of the aspect including the numerical image and not including the character image is referred to as "the decorative symbol of the second aspect". Called.

When the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, for example, the decorative symbol of the second aspect is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, a decorative symbol (the decorative symbol of the second aspect) in which a character is not attached to a large number is displayed before the reach, which is the effect period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the establishment of the reach. Will be done. This also applies to the time of the winning notification when the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is actually stopped when the second special symbol is stopped.

Further, when the reach is established in the probabilistic game state, the battle reach effect in which the own character and the enemy character fight is performed without going through the N reach effect as in the normal game state. During the battle reach effect in this probabilistic game state, a relatively small decorative symbol of the second aspect is displayed as in the case of SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state.

Returning to FIG. 25, in the SP development effect, an SP development sound suggesting the SP development effect is output, and BGM2 is stopped together with the output of the SP development sound. During the SP development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is developed, the BGM2 may be continuously output and the SP development sound may not be output. Further, during the SP development production, the BGM2 and the SP development sound may be output.

Next, the SP reach effect is started, and the BGM3 is started to be played back (time point T3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 27 (I)). That is, the reproduction is started from the beginning of the BGM3 at the timing when the SP reach effect is started. The BGM3 has a predetermined reproduction time, and this reproduction time is substantially equal to the production time of the SP reach effect. The timing at which the output of the BGM 3 is started may be during the SP development effect. For example, the output of the BGM 3 may be started at the timing when the SP development effect is started. Further, the output of the BGM 3 may be started during the SP development effect after the SP development effect is started. For example, the SP development sound suggesting the development to the SP reach effect may be output during the SP development effect, and the output of the BGM 3 may be started at the timing when the output of the SP development sound ends. Further, the BGM 3 may be started to be output during the output of the SP development sound. At this time, the volume of the BGM 3 may be controlled to be gradually increased. For example, the BGM3 is output at a lower volume than usual during the output of the SP development sound, the BGM3 becomes the normal volume at the timing when the output of the SP development sound ends, and then the BGM3 at the normal volume during the SP reach production. May be output. Further, at the timing when the SP reach effect is started (T3 in FIG. 25), the output of the BGM 2 may be finished and the output of the BGM 3 may be started.

The type of BGM3 music output during the SP reach production is determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, in the variation effect according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (effect mode) during the pre-reach effect, and the variation pattern is output during the SP reach effect. BGM_B3 may be output according to the above. When the jackpot variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (effect mode) during the pre-reach effect in the variation effect according to the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is output during the SP reach effect. BGM_C3 may be output according to the above. Further, the type of music in the pre-reach effect and the N-reach effect may be determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The type of BGM3 music output during the SP reach production may differ depending on the stage (production mode). For example, when the production is performed on the stage A, the BGM_A1 of the music A may be output during the pre-reach production, the BGM_A2 may be output during the N reach production, and the BGM_A3 may be output during the SP reach production. .. Further, for example, when the production is performed on the stage B, the BGM_B1 of the music B is output during the pre-reach production, the BGM_B2 is output during the N reach production, and the BGM_B3 is output during the SP reach production. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 27, during the SP reach effect, the SP reach moving image effect is performed in the central area of the screen, and the effect of expecting that the same kind of decorative symbols as those on the left and right stop is performed in the central area of the screen. (Fig. 27 (J)). For example, in the SP reach moving image production, a state in which a predetermined 2D animation character performs a predetermined operation is displayed, and a state in which a decorative pattern fluctuates in a central region of the screen is displayed. BGM3 is output during the SP reach production so as to synchronize with this video production. For example, it is directed whether or not the anime character accomplishes a predetermined mission, and when the anime character completes a predetermined mission, three similar decorative symbols stop and become a big hit, and the predetermined mission is achieved. If not, the decorative patterns of different types from the left and right will stop in the middle area and will be lost. During the SP reach effect, the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 are hidden. The hold display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed during the SP reach effect, the holding display 52 may be hidden and the changing display 53 may be displayed, or the changing display 53 may be displayed. May be hidden and the hold display 52 may be displayed.

Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the jackpot notification effect is performed when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the SP reach effect (points T4 and 27 in FIG. 25 (A)). (K)). Specifically, as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, the "8" symbol of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols is temporarily stopped.

When the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped, the BGM 3 is stopped and a jackpot notification sound is output (FIG. 25 (A)). For example, at the timing when the intermediate decorative symbol 51b stops, the BGM 3 may stop and a jackpot notification sound may be output. Further, the BGM3 is stopped immediately before the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and at the same time when the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped (or immediately after the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped), a jackpot notification sound is output. May be done.

After the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped, the jackpot notification effect is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) (FIG. 27 (L)). For example, during the jackpot notification effect, a state in which the anime character has achieved a predetermined mission is displayed, or a character image indicating the jackpot is displayed. Further, the movable accessory 7 may operate. Further, during the jackpot notification effect, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 may emit light in a mode indicating a jackpot (for example, rainbow color).

Then, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped relatively large in the center of the screen (FIG. 27 (M)), and then the three decorative symbols 51 are finally stopped in response to the stop display of the special symbol (FIG. 27 (N)). )). Specifically, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 27 (M)), and the decorative symbols are highlighted (for example, the three decorative symbols 51 shine or the three decorative symbols 51 are affected. Even after the highlighting of the decorative symbol is completed, the three decorative symbols 51 maintain the temporary stop for a predetermined period, and then the three decorative symbols 51 are actually stopped in response to the stop of the special symbol (FIG.). 27 (N)). When the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped and finally stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol 51 (decorative symbol of the first aspect) including a numerical image and a character image is displayed (FIGS. 27 (M) and (N)). .. Then, after the opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is to be performed is performed, the jackpot game is started.

Here, the highlighting of the decorative pattern will be described. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the decorative symbols of the three first aspects forming doublets are temporarily stopped, the "first reflection effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). .. The "first reflection effect" is an effect of adding a highlight light such as metallic luster to each decorative pattern and outputting an effect sound such as "Pishan!" From the speaker 24. In the first reflection effect, for example, the highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the left symbol, and at the same time, the highlight light is similarly added to the middle symbol and the right symbol. As a result, the light radiated to the decorative pattern can be made to appear as if it was mirror-reflected in front of the decorative pattern, and three similar decorative patterns can be emphasized as if they were objects having metallic luster. I can emphasize that more.

In the present embodiment, the first reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative symbol of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative symbol of the second aspect.

After the decorative symbols of the three first aspects forming doublets are temporarily stopped, the promotion effect may be performed without the first reflection effect (or after the first reflection effect is performed). .. The promotion effect is, for example, an effect that makes it expected that the three decorative symbols forming the doublet of "888" are changed to the three decorative symbols forming the doublet of "777". The doublets of "777" and "333" indicate, for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, and the doublets of even symbols such as "888" indicate, for example, 4R normal jackpot, and odd symbols such as "111" ("777" and "777" and The doublet numbers (odd numbers excluding "333") indicate 4R probability variation jackpot. The effect of changing from doublet such as "888", which usually indicates a jackpot, to doublet such as "777" or "111", which indicates a probability variation jackpot, is called a promotion success effect. On the other hand, a production that does not change from doublets such as "888", which usually indicates a jackpot, to doublets, which indicates a probabilistic jackpot, is called a promotion failure production.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the promotion failure effect or promotion success effect, the "second reflection effect" is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). In the "second reflection effect", for example, the highlight light is added to each decorative pattern as in the first reflection effect, and the character lines attached to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern (for example, "time is full"). This is an effect of outputting a line) from the speaker 24. In the second reflection effect, for example, the highlight light is added from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the numbers constituting the left symbol, and at the same time, the numbers constituting the middle symbol and the right symbol are also highlighted in the same manner. Add light. In this way, in the second reflection effect, the highlight light is attached to the entire decorative pattern in that the highlight light is attached to the numbers but not to the character. It is different from the reflection effect. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the decorative symbol in the pattern matching mode that will be stopped from now on without deteriorating the visibility of the character that emits the above lines.

In the present embodiment, the second reflection effect is an effect that is executed using the decorative symbol of the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed using the decorative symbol of the second aspect.

In the present embodiment, the stop display timing of the first special symbol is configured to arrive when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the second reflection effect. That is, a configuration is adopted in which the decorative symbol starts the main stop when a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the second reflection effect. By providing a predetermined time between the second reflection effect and the main stop, for example, even if a frame drop of an image occurs in the second reflection effect, it can be prevented from affecting the main stop.

The time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol may differ depending on the gaming state, or may be the same. Further, the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol may differ or may be the same depending on the type of jackpot. Further, the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect to the final stop of the decorative symbol may differ depending on the type of the decorative symbol constituting the doublet. When the decorative symbol (for example, "777") showing a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player stops, the decorative symbol (for example, "888") that shows a jackpot that is relatively unfavorable to the player stops. Rather, the time from the first reflection effect or the second reflection effect to the main stop may be longer or shorter.

FIG. 28 is an example of a screen view following FIG. 26, and is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the reach loss notification effect is performed when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the SP reach effect (FIG. 25 (B)). Time point T4, FIG. 28 (K)). Specifically, as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, a decorative symbol of a type different from the left and right decorative symbols (for example, the "7" symbol) is temporarily stopped. When the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped, the BGM3 is stopped (FIG. 25 (B)). For example, at the timing when the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped, the BGM 3 may be stopped and the reach loss notification sound may be output. The BGM3 stops immediately before the intermediate decorative symbol 51b stops (for example, 0.5 seconds before), and at the same time as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b stops (or immediately after the intermediate decorative symbol 51b stops), the reach loss notification sound is output. May be done.

Then, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped relatively large in the center of the screen in a lost manner (FIG. 28 (L)), and thereafter, the decorative symbols are not highlighted and the special symbols are stopped and displayed. The three decorative symbols 51 are finally stopped (FIG. 28 (M)). When the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped and finally stopped, a relatively large decorative symbol 51 including a numerical image and a character image is displayed.

If the right to judge the special symbol is reserved, the next special symbol will start to change when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. .. At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. If the right to determine the special symbol is not reserved, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and after that, when the game ball wins the start opening, the next The change of the special symbol of is started. In this case as well, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. The BGM1 may be reproduced from the position (elapsed time from the beginning) at the time point T1 in FIG. 25 (B).

After the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped at the time point T4 shown in FIG. 28 (K), the output of the BGM1 may be started during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. In another embodiment, when the BGM1 is output during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51, the BGM1 may be reproduced from the stopped position (elapsed time from the beginning) at the time point T1 in FIG. 25 (B).

In addition, in FIGS. 25 (A) and 25 (B), it is assumed that the special symbol stops at the same time point T5 in both the case of the jackpot and the case of the loss, but in reality, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is higher in the case of the jackpot. Is long. Therefore, the timing of the time point T5 in the jackpot pattern of FIG. 25 (A) is later than the timing of the time point T5 in the loss pattern of FIG. 25 (B), and the jackpot notification effect takes longer than the reach loss notification effect. long.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, different BGMs are output before reach, during N reach, and during SP reach. As described above, the mode of the decorative pattern is different before reach, during N reach, and during SP reach. Therefore, it can be said that the aspect of the decorative pattern and the BGM are related to each other. Specifically, BGM1 is output when a relatively large decorative symbol (decorative symbol including a number image and a character image) of the first aspect is displayed in a variable manner at high speed (FIGS. 26 (A) to 26 (C)). ), BGM1 stops when the two relatively large decorative symbols of the first aspect stop in the left and right regions (FIG. 26 (E)). BGM2 is output when the two relatively large decorative symbols of the first aspect are stopped in the left and right regions and the one relatively large decorative symbol of the first aspect is variablely displayed in the middle region at a low speed. (FIGS. 26 (F) to (G)). In the process of changing the relatively large decorative symbol of the first aspect to the relatively small decorative symbol of the second aspect, BGM2 is stopped and the SP development sound is output (FIG. 26 (H)). Then, the two relatively small decorative symbols of the second aspect stop at the left and right edges of the screen (positions on the left and right sides of the positions of the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol before reach), and are relatively large 1 When the decorative symbol of the second aspect fluctuates in the middle region of the screen, BGM3 is output (FIGS. 27 (I) to (J)).

(Control of BGM in the production pattern of FIG. 22 (3))
Next, the control of BGM in the case where the N reach effect is performed, the SP reach effect is developed, and the SPSP reach effect is further developed will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SP reach effect is further developed into the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a screen view after the SP reach effect is started. FIG. 33 is an example of the effect following FIG. 32 (H), and is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

In addition, in FIG. 31, the part different from FIG. 25 will be described, and the description of the part similar to FIG. 25 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 31, the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect are performed in order, the SP development effect is performed, and the SP reach effect is started (T0 to T3 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32 (A)).

Next, in the middle or the final stage of the SP reach effect, the SPSP development effect suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is performed (T4 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32 (B)). For example, in the central area of the screen, the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting that the SPSP reach effect is developed is stopped as the intermediate decoration symbol 51b, or a state in which a predetermined animation character grabs the SPSP development suggestion symbol is displayed. You may. Further, the movable accessory 7 may operate when the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped.

Subsequently, as the SPSP development effect, an image showing the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed is displayed (FIG. 32 (C)). For example, when the SPSP reach effect A is executed, the SPSP development image A is displayed, when the SPSP reach effect B is executed, the SPSP development image B is displayed, and when the SPSP reach effect C is executed, the SPSP development image B is displayed. , SPSP development image C is displayed. For example, as the SPSP development effect, a title display indicating the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed is displayed. When this title display is displayed, audio corresponding to the title display may be output. For example, when a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time (for example, OP3-3) is selected, the title display C indicating the SPSP reach effect C is displayed, and the SPSP reach effect C having a relatively high expectation is executed. NS. Further, when a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, OP3-1) is selected, the title display A indicating the SPSP reach effect A is displayed, and the SPSP reach effect A having a relatively low expectation is executed. NS. Here, the title display may be the title of the music.

Further, in the SPSP development effect, a switching image indicating switching to the SPSP reach effect is displayed (FIG. 32 (D)). For example, as a switching image, an image in which the images of the left and right doors are closed may be displayed. A blackout effect (also referred to as a darkening effect) may be performed between the time when the image of FIG. 32 (B) is displayed and the time when the image of FIG. 32 (D) is displayed. For example, after the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is stopped, the blackout effect may be performed, and then the title display of FIG. 32 (C) may be displayed. Here, the blackout effect (darkening effect) is an effect of displaying a relatively dark image from a state in which a relatively bright image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 to display the entire screen in a darkened state, such as a background image or a background image. This is an effect (an effect of darkening display) that makes the decorative pattern 51, other preview images, etc. difficult to see or invisible (concealed). For example, in the blackout effect, a black image or a relatively dark gray image is placed on the entire screen on the front layer of the background image or the decorative pattern 51 to cover the entire screen with a dark image and darken the entire screen. It is a production to do. Here, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the screen is managed by a plurality of layers. For example, the background image is arranged in the innermost layer (layer having the lowest priority) and has a decorative pattern. 51 is placed on the frontmost layer (higher priority layer), and when these multiple layers are displayed on the screen, the image of the front side layer is displayed, and the image of the back side layer is the front side. I can't see it because it's hidden behind the image of the layer. Therefore, when a black image is placed on the frontmost layer, the image on the back layer is hidden by the black image, and as a result, the entire screen is covered with the black image, and other images cannot be seen. Alternatively, by arranging a black image having a predetermined transparency on the foremost layer, the image on the innermost layer may be difficult to see. A blackout effect may be performed by such a method. Further, in the blackout effect, the background image may be replaced with a black image or a relatively dark gray image. Further, in the blackout effect, the background image is darkened (hidden) by arranging the black image on the layer between the background image and the decorative symbol 51, while the decorative symbol 51 is not darkened (relatively bright). It may be displayed as an image). Further, as a blackout effect, in addition to (or instead of) an effect of dimming the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, an effect of turning off the panel lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 or reducing the amount of light thereof may be performed. .. Further, the blackout effect may be performed before the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is stopped, and then the SPSP development suggestion symbol of FIG. 32 (B) may be stopped. Further, the blackout effect may be performed after the title display is displayed.

At the time T4 when the SPSP development effect is started, the output of the BGM3 is stopped. For example, the SPSP development sound suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect may be output at the timing when the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped, and the BGM3 may be stopped at the same time as the output of the SPSP development sound. Further, the BGM3 may be stopped immediately before the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped (for example, 0.5 seconds before). In addition, BGM3 may be stopped after the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped. Further, the blackout effect may be performed at the time point T4, and the BGM 3 may be stopped according to the start of the blackout effect. When the blackout effect is completed, an effect indicating that the SPSP reach effect is performed (for example, a title display indicating the type of the SPSP reach effect and a sound indicating that the SPSP reach effect is performed) may be performed.

During the blackout effect, the sound output may be restricted. Here, the sound limiting state is a silent state in which no sound is output, or a state in which relatively loud sounds are not output and only relatively quiet sounds are output. BGM is not output in the sound restricted state. Even when the sound is restricted during the blackout effect, an error sound is output when the gaming machine 1 detects an error. For example, when the gaming machine 1 detects fraud (for example, when it detects magnetism or when it hits right when it should hit left), or when it detects that the lower plate is full. Outputs an error sound according to the detected content. Further, when a prize is given to the starting port of the game ball in the sound-restricted state, a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the winning may not be output or may be output. In addition, when there is a prize at the start port of the game ball in the sound restricted state, the prize sound may or may not be output depending on the jackpot expectation of holding the special symbol judgment related to the prize. May be good.

When the SPSP reach effect C, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed, a blackout effect is performed during the execution of the SPSP development effect, and the sound is likely to be restricted, so that the SPSP reach effect, which has a relatively low degree of expectation, is produced. When A is executed, it may be difficult for the blackout effect to be performed during the execution of the SPSP development effect. Further, when the SPSP reach effect C is executed, the blackout effect is executed with a 100% probability during the execution of the SPSP development effect, and when the SPSP reach effect A is executed, the SPSP development effect is executed. The blackout effect does not have to be performed inside.

Then, after the SPSP development effect is performed, the SPSP reach effect is started (T5 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32 (E)). BGM4 starts playing in response to the start of the SPSP reach effect. That is, the reproduction is started from the beginning of the BGM4 at the timing when the SPSP reach effect is started. The BGM 4 has a predetermined reproduction time, and this reproduction time is substantially equal to the production time of the SPSP reach effect.

The timing at which the output of the BGM 4 is started may be during the SPSP development effect. For example, an SPSP development sound suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect during the SPSP development effect (for example, a sound effect output with the image of FIG. 32 (B) or a sound output with the title display of FIG. 32 (C)). Is output, and the output of the BGM 4 may be started at the timing when the output of the SPSP development sound ends. Further, the BGM 4 may be started to be output during the output of the SPSP development sound. At this time, the volume of the BGM 4 may be controlled to gradually increase. For example, the BGM4 is output at a lower volume than usual during the output of the SPSP development sound, the BGM4 becomes the normal volume at the timing when the output of the SPSP development sound ends, and then the BGM4 at the normal volume during the SPSP reach production. May be output. The normal volume of BGM4 during this SPSP reach production is higher than the normal volume of BGM3 (also BGM1 and 2). The normal volume of the BGM 4 may be the same as the normal volume of the BGM 3 (that is, the volume of the BGM during the SP reach production). Further, at the timing when the SPSP reach effect is started (T5 in FIG. 31), the output of the BGM 3 may be finished and the output of the BGM 4 may be started.

The type of BGM4 music output during the SPSP reach production is determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, in the variation effect according to the variation pattern, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (effect mode) during the pre-reach effect, and the variation pattern is output during the SPSP reach effect. BGM_B4 may be output according to the above. When the jackpot variation pattern OP3-3 is selected, BGM_A1 is output according to the stage (effect mode) during the pre-reach effect in the variation effect according to the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is output during the SPSP reach effect. BGM_C4 may be output according to the above.

As described above, the type of BGM1 during the pre-reach production differs depending on the production mode (stage) that does not depend on the variation pattern of the special symbol, while the types of BGM3 during the SP reach production and BGM4 during the SPSP reach production are special. It may be different depending on the variation pattern of the symbol. Further, the type of music during the N reach production may be different depending on the variation pattern, or may be different depending on the production mode. Further, the type of music during the N reach production may be fixed regardless of the variation pattern or the production mode. For example, during the N reach production, the BGM is fixed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (BGM that differs depending on the production mode, or the same BGM in any production mode), while it fluctuates during the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production. BGM corresponding to the pattern may be output.

For example, as described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the production is performed in any of eight production modes (stages) in the normal gaming state. In each stage, the type of BGM1, the background image, and the like are different. In the same stage, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is different, the same type of BGM1 is output during the pre-reach production. On the other hand, for example, the type of BGM4 during the SPSP reach effect differs depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol. For example, when the variation pattern OP3-1 is selected, BGM_A4 may be output during the SPSP reach effect, and when the variation pattern OP3-2 is selected, BGM_B4 may be output during the SPSP reach effect. The types of music (music A to H) are determined according to the fluctuation pattern, and the same music type may be output from the start of fluctuation. In this case, the same type of music is output through the pre-reach effect, the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect, and each part of the same type of music is output according to each effect.

The type of BGM4 music output during the SPSP reach effect may differ depending on the stage (effect mode). For example, when the production is performed on the stage A, the BGM_A1 of the music A is output during the pre-reach production, the BGM_A2 is output during the N reach production, the BGM_A3 is output during the SP reach production, and the SPSP reach production. May be output, BGM_A4 of the music A may be output.

In the SPSP reach moving image effect of FIG. 32 (E), for example, a live-action image is displayed and a state in which the decorative pattern fluctuates in the central region of the screen is displayed. For example, it is produced whether or not the person in the live-action video achieves a predetermined mission. During the SPSP reach effect, the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 are hidden. The hold display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed during the SPSP reach effect, the holding display 52 may be hidden and the changing display 53 may be displayed, or the changing display 53 may be displayed. May be hidden and the hold display 52 may be displayed. In the SPSP reach effect, a state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 51b fluctuates is displayed, and as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, an effect is performed in which the player is expected to stop the decorative symbols of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols (Fig.). 32 (F)). For example, an effect is performed in which the "8" symbol of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols and the "7" symbol of a different type are pressed against each other.

Following FIG. 32 (F), immediately before the jackpot notification effect at the end of the SPSP reach is performed (for example, 1 second before), the BGM 4 is stopped and the image on the screen is stopped for a moment (FIG. 32 (G)). For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (F), the movement of the two decorative symbols gradually slows down from the state in which the two decorative symbols are moving so as to press each other in the central region of the screen, and the movement of the two decorative symbols stops momentarily. do. BGM4 stops at this timing.

Then, when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the big hit notification effect is performed at the time point T6 (T6 in FIG. 31, FIG. 32 (H)). Specifically, as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, the "8" symbol of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stops, and the movable accessory 7 operates to advance to the vicinity of the center of the screen. The movable accessory 7 is normally housed between the game board 2 and the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and operates at the time of jackpot notification as shown in FIG. 32 (H) to advance to the vicinity of the center of the screen. It is configured as follows. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in a mode indicating a jackpot (for example, rainbow color).

After the jackpot notification effect is performed, the jackpot notification post-effect is performed (FIG. 33 (I)). In the production after the jackpot notification, the movable accessory 7 that has advanced near the center of the screen is stored in the initial position (both sides of the screen), and a video in which the person in the live-action video has achieved a predetermined mission is displayed in the center of the screen. NS.

Next, the screen is switched, and three decorative symbols 51 of the same type are displayed large in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (slightly fluctuated) (FIG. 33 (J)). Then, in response to the stop of the special symbol, three decorative symbols 51 of the same type are actually stopped (FIG. 33 (K)). Specifically, the three decorative symbols 51 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 33 (J)), and the decorative symbols are highlighted (for example, the three decorative symbols 51 shine or the three decorative symbols 51 are affected. Even after the highlighting of the decorative symbol is completed, the three decorative symbols 51 maintain the temporary stop for a predetermined period, and then the three decorative symbols 51 are actually stopped in response to the stop of the special symbol (Fig.). 33 (K)). At the time of temporary stop and main stop of these three decorative symbols 51, a relatively large decorative symbol including a numerical image and a character image is displayed. At the time of temporary stop and main stop of the three decorative symbols 51, a relatively large decorative symbol including a numerical image and not including a character image may be displayed.

FIG. 34 is an effect following FIG. 32 (F), and is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 34, after the same effect as in FIG. 32 (G) is performed, the reach loss notification effect is performed at the time point T6 (T6 in FIG. 31 (B), FIG. 34 (H)). Specifically, as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, a type of "7" symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols is temporarily stopped. Here, as shown in FIG. 32 (H), the movable accessory 7 does not operate. Further, in the reach loss notification effect, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 do not emit light in a mode indicating a jackpot (for example, rainbow color). Then, the screen is switched, and three decorative symbols 51 (decorative symbols including a number image and a character image) are displayed in a large size in the center of the screen in a lost manner and temporarily stopped, without highlighting the decorative symbols. , Three decorative symbols 51 are actually stopped according to the stop of the special symbol (FIG. 34 (I)).

Here, the details of sound control after the final stage of the SPSP reach production will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of sound control after the final stage of the SPSP reach effect in the case of a big hit or a loss.

As shown in FIG. 35 (A), when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the big hit notification effect is performed at the time point T6 after the SPSP reach effect is started and a predetermined time elapses. Immediately before this jackpot notification effect (for example, 1 second before time point T6), BGM4 stops. Then, at the time point T6, the jackpot notification effect is started, and the jackpot notification sound is output. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect indicating a jackpot, and is louder than the volume of the BGM4. In addition, an accessory effect in which the movable accessory 7 operates is also performed. After the jackpot notification sound and the accessory effect are performed, the movable accessory 7 may be retracted to the initial position, and the BGM 5 following the BGM 4 may be output. The BGM 5 may be, for example, the end of the chorus portion of the music (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). After that, at the time point T7, the variation effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the reach loss notification effect is performed at the time point T6 after the SPSP reach effect is started and a predetermined time elapses. Immediately before this reach loss notification effect (for example, 1 second before the time point T6), the BGM4 is stopped. Then, at the time point T6, the reach loss notification effect is performed. In the reach loss notification effect, the jackpot notification sound is not output but the reach loss notification sound is output. The volume of this reach loss notification sound is lower than that of the jackpot notification sound. Further, in the case of loss, BGM5 following BGM4 is not output.

If the right to judge the special symbol is reserved after the reach loss notification effect is performed, when a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the next special symbol is displayed. Fluctuations begin. At this time, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. If the right to determine the special symbol is not reserved, a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and after that, when the game ball wins the start opening, the next The change of the special symbol of is started. In this case as well, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning.

After the intermediate decorative symbol 51b is stopped at the time point T6 shown in FIG. 34 (H), during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51 (that is, while the image shown in FIG. 34 (I) is displayed). , BGM1 may be started to output. In this case, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning. When the BGM1 is output during the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 51, the BGM1 may be reproduced from the stopped position (elapsed time from the beginning) at the time point T1 in FIG. 31 (B).

In addition, in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), it is assumed that the special symbol stops at the same time point T7 in both the case of the jackpot and the case of the loss, but in reality, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is higher in the case of the jackpot. Is long. Therefore, the timing of the time point T7 in the jackpot pattern of FIG. 35 (A) is later than the timing of the time point T7 in the loss pattern of FIG. 35 (B), and the jackpot notification effect takes longer than the reach loss notification effect. long.

Here, there is a difference between the timing at which the BGM 4 is stopped and the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed. For example, the BGM 4 is stopped 1 second before the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, the timing at which the BGM 3 during the SP reach effect is stopped is substantially the same as the timing at which the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 31, even when the SP reach effect is developed to the SPSP reach effect, the timing at which the BGM3 during the SP reach effect is stopped is substantially the same as the timing at which the SP development effect is performed.

That is, the difference between the timing at which the BGM4 during the SPSP reach effect is stopped and the timing at which the winning notification effect (big hit notification effect or reach loss notification effect) is executed is the timing at which the BGM3 during the SP reach effect is stopped and the winning notification effect ( It is larger than the difference from the timing when the jackpot notification effect or reach loss notification effect) or SP development effect is executed. That is, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SPSP reach effect, the winning notification effect is performed after the first hour (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the BGM4 was stopped. On the other hand, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SP reach effect, or when the SPSP development effect is performed from the SP reach effect, the winning notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed almost at the same time as the stop of the BGM3.

Even when the winning notification effect is performed from the SP reach effect or the SPSP development effect is performed from the SP reach effect, the BGM 3 may be stopped immediately before the winning notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed. For example, the BGM 3 may be stopped 0.5 seconds before the winning notification effect or the SPSP development effect is performed. That is, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SP reach effect, or when the SPSP development effect is performed from the SP reach effect, the second time (for example, 0 seconds or 0, which is shorter than the first time) after the BGM3 is stopped. After a lapse of (0.5 seconds), a winning notification effect or an SPSP development effect may be performed.

In the above, when the winning notification effect is performed from the SPSP reach effect, the BGM4 is stopped immediately before the winning notification effect is started, but the BGM4 is stopped at the same time as the winning notification effect is started. May be good.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 35, the mode of the decorative symbol before reach, during N reach, during SP reach, and during SPSP reach and BGM are related to each other. Specifically, it is the same as the SP reach effect from the start of fluctuation to a predetermined timing during SP reach. During or at the end of the SP reach, the BGM3 stops when the two relatively small decorative symbols of the second aspect stop at the left and right edges of the screen and the SPSP development suggestion symbol stops in the middle region (FIG. 32 (FIG. 32). B)). This SPSP development suggestion symbol is larger than the decorative symbol of the second aspect which is stopped on the left and right. After that, when the SPSP reach effect is started with the two relatively small decorative symbols of the second aspect stopped at the left and right edges of the screen, BGM4 is output (FIG. 32 (E)). Here, the left and right decorative symbols in the second aspect during SPSP reach may have the same size as the left and right decorative symbols in the second aspect during SP reach, or may have different sizes. For example, the left and right decorative symbols in the second aspect during SPSP reach may be smaller than the left and right decorative symbols in the second aspect during SP reach. Then, just before the two relatively small decorative symbols of the second aspect stop at the left and right edges of the screen and the one relatively large decorative symbol of the second aspect stops in the middle region of the screen, the BGM4 stops. do.

(Control of BGM in the production pattern of FIG. 22 (4))
Next, the control of BGM when the SPSP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the SPSP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the SP reach effect is performed from the N reach effect. FIG. 38 is an example of a screen view following FIG. 37, and is a diagram showing an example of a screen view when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 36, the pre-reach effect is performed and the N reach effect is performed according to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (T0 to T1 in FIG. 36, FIGS. 37 (A) to 37 (F)). Specifically, during the pre-reach production, the BGM1 is output, the BGM1 is stopped according to the reach establishment, and the reach establishment sound is output. Then, the BGM2 is output at the same time as the N reach effect is started.

Next, immediately before the time point T2, the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect slowly moves from the upper part to the lower part of the screen (FIG. 37 (G)). Then, the SPSP development suggestion symbol stops in the central region of the screen, and the SPSP development effect is started (T2 in FIG. 36, FIG. 37 (H)). At this time, the BGM 2 is stopped, and the SPSP development sound suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is output. If the SPSP development suggestion symbol does not stop in the central area of the screen, it does not develop into the SPSP reach effect.

In the SPSP development effect, similarly to the above, the left decorative symbol 51a moves to the upper left of the screen while shrinking, and the right decorative symbol 51c moves to the upper right of the screen while shrinking. At this time, the image of the character as a part of the left decorative symbol 51a is separated from the image of the numbers, and only the image of the numbers is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The same applies to the right decorative symbol 51c. When the N reach effect is developed into the SPSP reach effect in this way, the decorativeness (size, presence / absence of characters) of the decorative symbol 51 is reduced.

Further, in the SPSP development effect, the title is displayed (FIG. 38 (I)) as in the case of developing from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect, and a switching image indicating that the SPSP reach effect is switched to is displayed ( FIG. 38 (J). The blackout effect may be performed between the time when the screen of FIG. 37 (H) is displayed and the time when the screen of FIG. 38 (J) is displayed. For example, after the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is stopped, the blackout effect may be performed, and then the title display of FIG. 38 (I) may be displayed. Further, the blackout effect may be performed before the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped, and then the title display of FIG. 38 (I) may be displayed.

Then, after the SPSP development effect, the SPSP reach effect is started, and the BGM4 is output (T3 in FIG. 36, FIG. 38 (K)). After that, the SPSP reach effect is performed in the same manner as described above, and when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the big hit notification effect is performed (T4 in FIG. 36, FIGS. 38 (L) to (N)). If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, a reach loss notification effect is performed (not shown).

Immediately before the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed, the BGM 4 is stopped (FIGS. 36 and 38 (M)). Specifically, as in FIG. 35, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is started (for example, 1 second before).

When the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed from the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 4 may be stopped at the same time as the jackpot notification effect or the reach loss notification effect is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific musical piece is output during the variable effect, and the effect proceeds according to the output of the musical piece. Specifically, the music is composed of BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, and BGM5, BGM1 is output during the pre-reach production, BGM2 is output during the N reach production, and BGM3 is output during the SP reach production. BGM4 is output during the SPSP reach production. In addition, BGM5 is output in the jackpot notification effect. That is, as the production progresses as the pre-reach effect, the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, and BGM4 are output in order. Since the music progresses as the production progresses in this way, the player who knows the music can recognize the progress of the production according to the position of the music, and which part of the music is output. It is possible to recognize whether the reach effect is being executed, and it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation.

Further, during the pre-reach production, the BGM1 which is the prelude part of the music is repeatedly output. BGM1 is a repetition of a predetermined rhythm, and even when the loss fluctuation pattern (FIG. 18C) is continuously selected, the predetermined rhythm is repeated. Even if the reach variation pattern (FIG. 18B) or the jackpot variation pattern is selected when the loss variation pattern is continuous, BGM1 is output in the pre-reach effect in the variation effect by the reach variation pattern or the jackpot variation pattern. After that, according to the execution of N reach effect, SP reach effect, etc., the process shifts from BGM1 to another BGM. Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the production according to the flow of the music without discomfort.

Further, in the present embodiment, the BGM is stopped when shifting from one effect to another. For example, when developing from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect, the BGM2 is stopped, and then the BGM3 is output. Further, when developing from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect, the BGM 3 is stopped, and then the BGM 4 is output. Therefore, the boundary of each reach effect can be easily recognized by the player, and for example, it is possible to easily recognize that the N reach effect has been changed to the SP reach effect with high expectation. Also, by stopping the BGM when developing from one reach production to another reach production, even if the length of each production and the length of each part of the music do not completely match, the reach production and each part of the music You can set the time. For example, in the variable effect that develops from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 25, even if the playback time of the BGM2 is shorter than the time from the start time T1 of the N reach effect to the start time T3 of the SP reach effect, the SP By stopping BGM2 during the development production, the flow of the reach production and the progress of the music can be matched.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot notification effect for notifying the jackpot is executed, the BGM that has been output until immediately before is stopped. For example, when the jackpot notification effect is executed from the N reach effect, the BGM2 is stopped at the timing when the jackpot notification effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot notification effect is executed from the SP reach effect, the BGM3 during the SP reach effect is stopped at the timing when the jackpot notification effect is executed (before the second hour when the jackpot notification effect is executed). Further, when the jackpot notification effect is executed from the SPSP reach effect, the BGM4 is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is executed (before the first hour). This makes it possible to emphasize the jackpot notification effect.

(Control of BGM when a production other than the reach production is performed)
Next, the control of BGM when other effects are performed during the execution of the pre-reach effect and the reach effect (N reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) will be described. Hereinafter, regarding the control of BGM when another effect is performed during the pre-reach effect, one of the variable effects (variable patterns OP4-1 to 3 and HP4-1 to 3) that develop from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect. A variation effect based on) will be described as an example. It should be noted that the variable production that develops from the N reach production to the SPSP reach production is not limited to the variable production in which the reach production is not performed, the variable production in which the N reach production is performed, the variable production in which the N reach production and the SP reach production are performed, and N. As for the variable effect that develops from the reach effect to the SP reach effect and further develops into the SPSP reach effect, the same effect as the following may be performed, and the same control regarding BGM is performed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130 determines a variation effect scenario (each effect pattern in FIG. 22) including a reach effect based on the variation pattern determined by the game control unit 100. After determining the scenario of the variable effect, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the first effect (for example, advance notice effect) other than the reach effect by lottery using random numbers. When a certain fluctuation pattern is determined, the reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, but even if the same variation pattern is determined, the first effect other than the reach effect is sometimes performed. Sometimes there isn't. Hereinafter, BGM control when the first effect is performed and when the first effect is not performed will be described.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the first effect is executed while BGM1 is being output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

As described above, BGM1 is continuously output during the pre-reach production. During this time, the BGM1 having a reproduction time shorter than the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be repeatedly reproduced, or the BGM1 having a reproduction time longer than the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be reproduced. Further, the BGM1 having the same reproduction time as the execution period of the pre-reach effect may be reproduced.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first effect may be executed during the execution of the pre-reach effect (for example, the time point t1 before the time point T1 when the N reach effect is started). The first effect is an effect based on the result of the special symbol determination. The first effect may be a notice effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot (for example, a notice effect with an expectation of 0.1% to 80%), or a definite effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed. (Expectation is 100%). For example, as the first effect, the character may be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 may emit light in a predetermined mode. Further, as the first effect, a predetermined effect sound (for example, a character's voice or other sound effect) may be output from the speaker 24. Further, as the first effect, an effect suggesting the possibility of a set value related to the jackpot probability may be performed. For example, an effect suggesting that the set value related to the jackpot probability is high (that is, the jackpot probability is high) may be executed as the first effect. Further, as the first effect, an effect indicating the determination of the set value related to the jackpot probability may be performed. For example, an effect that deterministically notifies (100%) that the set value related to the jackpot probability is "6" may be executed as the first effect.

During the execution of the first effect, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. That is, the BGM1 that was output before the execution of the first effect is output even during the execution of the first effect, and the BGM1 is output even after the end of the first effect. Here, during the execution of the first effect, the volume of the BGM 1 may be the same as before and after the execution of the first effect, or may be lower than before and after the execution of the first effect. For example, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect or a character's voice) related to the first effect may be output during the execution of the first effect, and the volume of the BGM 1 may be lowered during the output of the effect sound. For example, the volume value of each sound output from the speaker 24 (channel volume value described later) can be set from "0 (mute)" to "10". The volume value of BGM1 may be set to "5" before the execution of the first effect, and the volume value of BGM1 may be set to "3" during the execution of the first effect. Then, when the first effect is completed, the volume value of the BGM 1 may be set to "5", which is the same as before the execution of the first effect. Although the reproduction of the BGM1 is continued internally during the execution of the first effect, the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0". For example, the volume value of BGM1 is set to "5" before the execution of the first effect, the volume value of BGM1 is set to "0" during the execution of the first effect, and the volume of BGM1 is set to "0" when the first effect is completed. The value may be returned to "5".

In this way, even if the first effect is performed during the pre-reach effect, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced. Therefore, regardless of whether the first production is performed or not, the production can proceed without breaking the rhythm during the pre-reach production, and the rhythm of the music and the progress of the production can be matched. Can be done.

The first effect may be performed during the execution of the N reach effect (time points T1 to T2), or the first effect may be performed between the pre-reach effect and the N reach effect. Further, the first effect may be performed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect (time points T3 to T4). Further, the timing at which the first effect is executed may be arbitrarily determined. For example, based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, the effect pattern of the variation effect including the pre-reach effect, the N reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect is determined, and whether or not the first effect is performed based on the determined effect pattern. The timing of the first production is determined by lottery. When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the probability that the effect pattern of the variable effect accompanied by the first effect is determined may be higher than the probability that the effect pattern of the variable effect not accompanied by the first effect is determined. The timing of performing the first effect may be any of the pre-reach effects (time points T0 to T1), the N reach effects (time points T1 to T2), and the SPSP development effect. It may be any of the middle (time points T2 to T3) and any of the SPSP reach production (time points T3 to T4).

As shown in FIG. 39, when the N reach effect is executed, BGM1 is stopped and BGM2 is output. Further, when the N reach effect is completed and the SPSP reach effect is executed, the reproduction and output of the BGM 4 are started. The BGM output start timing at this time is as described above. That is, at the time point T1, the BGM1 is stopped and the reach establishment sound is output, and the BGM2 is output after the reach establishment sound is output. Further, at the time point T2, the BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, the SPSP development sound is output, and after the SPSP development effect is performed, the BGM4 is output at the same time as the SPSP reach effect is started.

During the SPSP reach production, BGM4 is continuously output. The first production may be performed during the SPSP reach production. For example, while the SPSP reach moving image effect is displayed in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, a predetermined cut-in image may be displayed on the full screen as the first effect. The reproduction and output of the BGM 4 are continued even during the execution of this first effect. The volume of the BGM 4 may be lowered during the execution of the first effect, or the volume value of the BGM 4 may be set to "0" while the reproduction of the BGM 4 is continued. For example, before the execution of the first effect, the volume value of BGM4 is set to "8" (volume higher than BGM1 and 2), and during the execution of the first effect, the volume value of BGM4 is "3" or "0 (" Mute) ”is set, and after the execution of the first effect, the original volume value“ 8 ”may be restored.

After that, a jackpot notification effect is performed at T4 at the end of the SPSP reach effect. When the jackpot notification effect is performed, the BGM4 is stopped. Specifically, as described above, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is started. At this time, the reproduction of BGM4 is not performed internally. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the BGM 4 is stopped, the jackpot notification effect is executed and the jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output. The volume of this jackpot notification sound is higher than the volume of the BGM4 that was output until just before. Further, after the BGM 4 is stopped and the jackpot notification sound is output, the BGM 5 following the BGM 4 may be output. That is, the BGM 4 may be stopped immediately before the start of the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification sound may be output in response to the start of the jackpot notification effect, and then the BGM 5 following the BGM 4 may be reproduced and output. The volume of the BGM 5 may be higher, the same, or lower than the volume of the BGM 4 that was output until immediately before the jackpot notification effect. After that, at the time point T5, the variation effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

In this way, when the jackpot notification effect is performed, the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized by stopping the BGM that has been output until just before, and the player can pay attention to the jackpot notification effect. Therefore, the player's expectation and satisfaction can be increased.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of the reproduction position of the BGM at the time when each effect is started. In addition, in FIG. 40, the case where the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit will be described, but when the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the reach loss notification effect is performed instead of the big hit notification effect. It is the same as FIG. 40.

As shown in FIG. 40 (A), the variation of the special symbol starts at the time point T0, and the variation effect is started. The BGM1 starts playing from T0 at the start of the variation effect. BGM1 is music having a reproduction time of sx seconds (for example, 10 seconds). The beginning of BGM1 (when the reproduction starts: when the reproduction time is 0 seconds) is described as "s0". When sx seconds have elapsed from the start of reproduction of BGM1, BGM1 is reproduced from the beginning again. Here, the first effect may be started when s1 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) have elapsed from the beginning of the BGM1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the first effect may be started when s2 seconds (for example, 8 seconds) have elapsed from the beginning of the BGM1. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), the BGM1 may be reproduced before the variation effect is started at the time point T0. In this case, the first effect may be started when s3 seconds (for example, 3 seconds) have elapsed from the beginning of the BGM1.

As described above, the first effect can be started at a random reproduction position (elapsed time from the beginning of BGM1) in BGM1. Even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same, the first effect is started at a random reproduction position in BGM1. For example, the variation pattern OP4-1 may be selected in a certain special symbol determination, and the first effect may be started when s1 time has elapsed from the beginning of the BGM1, or the variation pattern OP4-1 may be started in another special symbol determination. Is selected, and the first effect may be started when s2 hours have elapsed from the beginning of the BGM1.

On the other hand, the SPSP reach effect is performed at T3 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the special symbol. When the SPSP reach effect is started, the BGM4 is played and output. BGM4 is music having a playback time of sy seconds longer than sx seconds. BGM4 starts playing from the beginning. The beginning of BGM4 is written as "r0". When r1 hour (for example, 50 seconds) has elapsed from the start of playback of BGM4, BGM4 is stopped and a jackpot notification effect is performed. The jackpot notification effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM 4 (elapsed time (r1) from the beginning of the BGM 4). Specifically, since the BGM4 is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is started, the BGM4 is played from the positions r0 to r1 and then stopped, and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the stop of the BGM4. At that point, the jackpot notification effect is started.

That is, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same and the reproduction of the BGM 4 proceeds to the position of r1 in the BGM 4, the jackpot notification effect is started. For example, in a certain special symbol determination, the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected, and when r1 time has elapsed from the beginning of the BGM4, the BGM4 is stopped and the jackpot notification effect is started. Also, when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in another special symbol determination, the BGM4 is stopped when r1 time has elapsed from the beginning of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started.

As described above, the first effect is started at a random reproduction position (elapsed time from the beginning of the BGM) in the BGM. Since the first production is randomly started when the BGM is flowing in a good rhythm, the production can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

On the other hand, since the jackpot notification effect is started at a fixed playback position of the BGM (for example, the end of the BGM), the player can be made to recognize the timing when the jackpot notification effect is performed by the music, and the player can be made to recognize the timing of the jackpot notification effect according to the flow of the music. It is possible to raise the expectations of the player. Since the BGM is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is started, the BGM is stopped for a moment to be in a quiet state, and the player's expectations can be raised immediately before the jackpot notification effect is performed.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is different, different types of BGM4 are output, the BGM4 is stopped at different reproduction positions of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. For example, when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected in a certain special symbol determination, the BGM4 is stopped when r1 time has elapsed from the beginning of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. Further, when the variation pattern OP4-2 is selected in another special symbol determination, the BGM4 is stopped when r2 hours (a time longer than r1) elapses from the beginning of the BGM4, and the jackpot notification effect is started. Different types of BGM4 may be output during the SPSP reach effect depending on whether the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected or the variation pattern OP4-2 is selected.

By making the fixed playback position where the BGM stops (the position where the jackpot notification effect is started) different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the player is given the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot expectation degree) depending on how far the music has progressed. ) Can be recognized, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be recognized.

Next, as the first effect, a case where a premier effect suggesting that the jackpot game is executed will be described.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the premier effect is executed while the BGM 1 is output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 41, the variation of the special symbol starts, and the pre-reach effect is performed. BGM1 is output during the pre-reach production. The premier production may be executed at the time t1 during the pre-reach production. The premier effect is a definite effect that suggests that the jackpot game is executed (that is, the definite jackpot), and the frequency of appearance is extremely low (for example, 1/10000). In the premier effect, for example, a premier image (image of a premier character, an image of a premier pattern, etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and a color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 confirms the jackpot. ) Is a production that emits light. Further, the premier effect may be an effect of operating the movable accessory 7 in a predetermined mode as an effect suggesting the determination of the jackpot, or an effect of causing the movable accessory 7 to emit light in a predetermined mode. .. Further, the premier effect may be an effect in which an effect object different from the movable accessory 7 is operated in a predetermined mode or is made to emit light in a predetermined mode. Further, the premier effect may be an effect of displaying the decorative symbol 51 in a manner suggesting the determination of the jackpot (for example, a specific combination of the decorative symbols 51, a display of a specific symbol). Further, the premier production may be a production that outputs a sound suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed.

While the premiere production is being performed, the BGM1 is continuously played and output. For example, the volume of the BGM 1 during the premiere production may be the same as before and after the execution of the premier production, or may be lower than before and after the execution of the premier production. Further, during the premiere production, the reproduction of the BGM1 is continued internally (although the reproduction position advances with the passage of time), but the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0". Further, during the premiere production, for example, the voice of the premier character or the sound effect indicating the confirmation of the jackpot may be output. Even if the volume of BGM1 during the premiere production is lowered, the volume of BGM1 is restored after the premiere production. That is, the type and volume of BGM1 do not change before and after the premiere production. After the premiere production, the volume of the BGM1 may be lowered or raised, or different types of BGM1 may be output.

The premier production may be executed during the N reach production (time points T1 to T2), during the SPSP development production (time points T2 to T3), or during the SPSP reach production (time points T3 to T3). It may be executed in T4). Further, the premier production may be performed a plurality of times in one change of the special symbol. For example, the premiere effect may be performed at the start of the change of the special symbol and during the N reach effect. Even in this case, the BGM is continuously reproduced and output during the execution of each premier effect. In addition, there may be a premier production in which the BGM is continued and a premier production in which the BGM is stopped.

After the premier production is performed in the pre-reach production, the reach is established, BGM1 is stopped, the N reach production is started, and BGM2 is output. After that, BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the SPSP reach effect is started. The output of BGM4 is started when the SPSP reach effect is started. Then, as described above, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is executed. At this time, the reproduction of BGM4 is not performed internally. When a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the BGM 4 is stopped, the jackpot notification effect is performed and the jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output. The volume of this jackpot notification sound is higher than the volume of the BGM4 that was output until just before. Further, after the BGM 4 is stopped and the jackpot notification sound is output, the BGM 5 following the BGM 4 may be output. That is, the BGM 4 may be stopped immediately before the start of the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification sound may be output in response to the start of the jackpot notification effect, and then the BGM 5 following the BGM 4 may be reproduced and output. The volume of the BGM 5 may be higher, the same, or lower than the volume of the BGM 4 that was output until immediately before the jackpot notification effect. After that, at the time point T5, the variation effect ends according to the stop display of the special symbol.

In this way, even when the premier effect suggesting the determination of the jackpot is executed during the output of the BGM 1, the BGM 1 is continuously output as in the case where the premier effect is not executed. In addition, BGM4 is stopped in the final jackpot notification effect regardless of whether the premier effect is executed or not.

Therefore, the production can be advanced along the flow of music until the final jackpot notification production, and the continuity of the production can be maintained. On the other hand, by stopping the music in the final jackpot notification effect, the player's expectation can be raised and the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized.

The premier production may be performed together with other advance notice productions. Here, in order to "perform both the premier effect and the other notice effect", the other notice effect is executed during the execution of the premier effect, and the other notice effect is executed after the execution of the premier effect. , It is included that other notice effects are executed before the execution of the premier effect. That is, if the production is performed in such a manner that the premier production and the other preview production have some relation, the premier production and the other preview production do not necessarily have to be performed at the same time. For example, during the premier effect, a premier character that constitutes the premier effect and another character that does not form the premier effect may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. In this way, whether or not the premier effect is combined with other notice effects may be determined by a lottery of the effect control unit 130. When it was decided to combine the premier production with other preview productions, the premier production and other preview productions were executed together, and it was not decided to combine the premier production with other preview productions. In that case, only the premier production is performed. On the other hand, the jackpot notification effect is not performed together with the other notice effect that may be performed in combination with the premier effect. That is, the jackpot notification effect is not executed in combination with the other notice effect that may be performed in combination with the premier effect.

Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the effect may be performed using more effect means than those used in the premier effect. For example, in the premier production, the premier production is performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 (image displayed on), the speaker 24 (sound from), and either the board lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37, and a big hit. In the notification effect, in addition to both the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the board lamp 25, and the frame lamp 37, a movable accessory 7 may be used to notify the jackpot.

In the jackpot notification effect, a more decorative effect is performed than the premier effect. Here, a highly decorative production is a production that looks flashy to the player. For example, in the final jackpot notification effect of the variable effect, the movable accessory 7 operates and an image suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and it is movable in the pre-reach effect and the premier effect during the reach effect. The accessory 7 may not operate and an image suggesting the determination of the jackpot may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, a louder sound may be output than when the premier effect is executed, a flashy sound (for example, a high sound) may be output, or a long sound may be output. good.

In addition, a premier production may be performed during the SPSP reach production. For example, as a premier effect during the SPSP reach effect, a cut-in image suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot may be displayed on the full screen. In this case, during the premiere production, the output of the BGM that was output until immediately before that may be continued. The volume of the BGM during the premiere production may be the same as immediately before the premiere production, or may be lowered. Further, during the premiere production, the playback of the BGM is continued, but the volume value may be set to "0".

Whether or not to execute the premier effect is determined by the effect control unit 130 based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, when the effect control unit 130 receives the variation start command from the game control unit 100, it determines whether or not to execute the premier effect based on the variation pattern included in the variation start command. Determined by the lottery used. In this case, the shorter the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the higher the proportion of the premier effect being executed. For example, when the variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, the ratio of executing the premier effect may be higher than when the variation pattern OP4-1 is selected. Further, when the variation pattern OP1-1 is selected, the ratio of executing the premier effect may be higher than when the variation pattern OP3-1 is selected. For example, there are a first table and a second table for deciding whether or not to execute the premier effect, and the ratio of executing the premier effect differs depending on which table is used for the lottery. For example, when a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected, a lottery is performed using the first table, and when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected, a lottery is performed using the second table. It is said. When the lottery is performed using the first table, the ratio of determining that the premier effect is executed is relatively high, and when the lottery is performed using the second table, it is determined that the premier effect is executed. The ratio is relatively low. When the lottery is performed using the first table, the ratio of determining that the premier effect is executed may be 100%. For example, when a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected, the ratio of determining the effect pattern of the variation effect including the premier effect is higher than the rate of determining the effect pattern of the variation effect not including the premier effect. You may. Further, when a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected, the ratio of determining the effect pattern of the variation effect including the premier effect is lower than the ratio of determining the effect pattern of the variation effect not including the premier effect. You may.

Some players find the production annoying when the long production continues endlessly after the premiere production that suggests the confirmation of the jackpot is executed. However, since the ratio of the premier effect being executed is set to be higher as the fluctuation time is shorter, the variation effect is completed in a relatively short time after the premier effect is executed, and the jackpot game is performed. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling such annoyance. In this case, the BGM may be switched after the premier effect is executed (or while the premier effect is being executed). For example, BGM1 and BGM2, which are the first half of the music, may be output before the execution of the premier production, and the second half (for example, BGM5) of the music may be output after the execution of the premiere production. As a result, the player can enjoy the music even when the fluctuation time is short. When a specific fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected, the premier effect may be executed at a rate of 100%. Further, contrary to the above, the longer the fluctuation time of the special symbol is, the higher the ratio of the premier effect being executed may be. Further, when a specific fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected, the premier effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

Next, a case where an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operating means is performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect will be described.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect in the effect pattern of FIG. 41 when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 42, for example, the premier effect may be executed during the pre-reach effect. During the premiere production, BGM1 is continuously played and output. Since the premier production of FIG. 42 is the same as the premier production of FIG. 41, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42, an operation promotion effect (hereinafter referred to as a second operation promotion effect) may be performed at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect. Here, the operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means. The presence or absence of the second operation promotion effect may be determined by the effect control unit 130 performing a lottery using random numbers based on the variation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the presence or absence of the second operation promotion effect may be determined in response to the variation pattern, and when a certain variation pattern is selected, the second operation promotion effect is always performed and another variation pattern is selected. In that case, the second operation promotion effect may not be performed.

For example, at the time point t2 (for example, 8 seconds before the time point T4) before the jackpot notification effect is started, the second operation promotion effect is started. The second operation promotion effect is an effect performed immediately before the jackpot notification effect (or reach loss notification effect) is executed, and is, for example, an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28 as an example of the operation means. .. For example, during the second operation promotion effect, an image imitating the effect lever 28 and an image showing an operation effective period in which the player's operation is effective are displayed. Further, the effect lever 28 itself may emit light by emitting light from the LED built in the effect lever 28 during the second operation promotion effect. Further, the effect lever 28 itself may vibrate due to the operation of the vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect lever 28 during the second operation promotion effect. If the effect lever 28 vibrates during the second operation promotion effect, there may be a 100% possibility that the jackpot notification effect will be performed after that, or if the effect lever 28 vibrates during the second operation promotion effect. The jackpot notification effect may be more likely to be performed than when the effect lever 28 does not vibrate during the second operation promotion effect.

When the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, if the effect lever 28 is operated during the second operation promotion effect, the jackpot notification effect is performed according to the operation. Further, during the second operation promotion effect, an operation valid period in which the operation on the effect lever 28 is effective is set, and when the operation effective period elapses without the effect lever 28 being operated, the jackpot notification effect is performed. The effect lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating the vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect lever 28 during the jackpot notification effect.

When the second operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is performed at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, it is more likely that the jackpot notification effect will be performed after that than when the second operation promotion effect is not performed. For example, if the second operation promotion effect is performed, the possibility of a big hit (expectation) is 50% or more after that, and if the second operation promotion effect is not performed, the possibility of a big hit after that is possible. May be 35%. In addition, a second operation promotion effect suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed (expectation is 100%) may be performed.

If the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, the reach loss notification effect is performed according to the operation of the effect lever 28 during the second operation promotion effect or according to the elapse of the operation valid period.

When the second operation promotion effect is executed at the end of the SPSP reach effect, the BGM4 output during the SPSP reach effect is stopped. The BGM4 is also stopped during the jackpot notification effect after the second operation promotion effect. Hereinafter, the control of the BGM at the time of executing the second operation promotion effect will be described.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the second operation promotion effect and BGM control at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect of FIG. 42. FIG. 43 (A) is a diagram showing an example in which BGM 4 is stopped during the operation valid period, and FIG. 43 (B) is a diagram showing an example in which BGM 4 is stopped during the operation preparation period. ) Is a diagram showing an example in which BGM4 is stopped before the operation preparation period.

As shown in FIG. 43, the second operation promotion effect is divided into an operation valid period in which the operation of the effect lever 28 is effective and an operation preparation period (before the operation valid period). At the time point t2, the operation preparation period of the second operation promotion effect starts. The operation preparation period is a period for preparing the player to operate the effect lever 28, and after that, an effect suggesting that the operation of the effect lever 28 is effective is performed. For example, an image imitating a part of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and an effect suggesting the possibility of displaying an image imitating the entire effect lever 28 is performed. An example of the production during the operation preparation period will be described later.

The operation valid period starts at the time t3 when the operation preparation period elapses from the time point t2. During the operation valid period, an effect indicating that the operation of the effect lever 28 is currently effective is performed. For example, an image showing the validity period of the operation is displayed together with an image imitating the entire effect lever 28. Further, during the operation valid period, the effect lever 28 itself may emit light by emitting light from the LED built in the effect lever 28. Further, during the operation effective period, the effect lever 28 itself may vibrate by operating the vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect lever 28. An example of the effect during the operation valid period will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 43 (A), even if the second operation promotion effect is started at the time point t2, the BGM4 may be output until the time point t3 when the operation preparation period elapses. BGM4 is stopped at the timing when the operation valid period starts at the time point t3. After this point t3, BGM4 remains stopped. Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), the jackpot notification effect is performed at the time point T4. In the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output from the speaker 24.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), the BGM 4 may be stopped at the timing when the operation preparation period of the second operation promotion effect is started at the time point t2. After this point t2, BGM4 remains stopped. The operation validity period starts at t3 when the operation preparation period elapses. Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), the jackpot notification effect is performed at the time point T4. In the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification sound is output from the speaker 24.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), the BGM 4 may be stopped at the time point t4 immediately before the operation preparation period of the second operation promotion effect is started. For example, the BGM 4 may be stopped 1 second before the operation preparation period is started. After this point t4, BGM4 remains stopped. After the BGM4 is stopped at the time point t4, the operation preparation period of the second operation promotion effect is started at the time point t2. After that, the operation valid period starts at t3 when the operation preparation period elapses. Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), the jackpot notification effect is performed at the time point T4. In the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification sound is output from the speaker 24.

Note that, in FIGS. 43A to 43C, a sound prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 (hereinafter referred to as a second operation guidance sound) may be output during the second operation promotion effect. For example, a second operation guidance sound (for example, a voice of "pull the lever") may be output during the operation preparation period. Further, the second operation guidance sound may be output during the operation valid period. Further, the sound may be restricted during the operation valid period. The sound limiting state may be a completely silent state or a state in which a relatively quiet sound is output. For example, while relatively loud sounds such as BGM, jackpot notification sound, and second operation guidance sound are not output, the valid period image 81 (described later) displays how the remaining time of the operation valid period is reduced. A sound effect indicating a decrease in the operation validity period may be output at a relatively low volume.

As described above, if the gaming machine 1 detects an error even in the sound limiting state, the error sound is output. Further, in this sound limiting state, it is not necessary to output a predetermined winning sound that is output when the game ball wins a prize at the starting port. Even in the sound-restricted state, a relatively large predetermined winning sound that is output when the game ball wins the starting opening may be output. In this case, the winning sound may or may not be output based on the result of the preliminary determination. For example, when there is a prize at the start port of the game ball in the sound restricted state, and the jackpot expectation of holding the special symbol determination related to the prize is high (for example, the hold display 52 is "red" or "gold"). (When displayed), a winning sound is output, and even if there is a winning at the start port of the game ball in the sound restricted state, when the expectation is low (for example, the hold display 52 is displayed in normal "white"). Sometimes), the winning sound may not be output.

In addition, a blackout effect may be performed during the second operation promotion effect. For example, the operation validity period may be started after the blackout effect is performed. Further, a blackout effect may be performed in which an image other than the image imitating the effect lever 28 and the image indicating the operation effective period is darkened during the operation valid period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the BGM control during the second operation promotion effect may be performed in any of FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (C). Further, which of FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (C) may be used to control the BGM may be determined by lottery. Further, the degree of expectation of a big hit after that may differ depending on which of FIGS. 43 (A) to 43 (C) the control is performed.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the present embodiment, the second operation promotion effect may or may not be performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect of the variation effect. BGM4 is stopped during the second operation promotion effect. As a result, the player can pay attention to the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final jackpot notification effect, and the player can concentrate on the operation of the effect lever 28. In addition, during the second operation promotion effect (for example, during the operation valid period), when the sound is restricted (completely silent state or a state in which only a relatively small sound is output), more players are allowed to play. You can concentrate on the operation. By setting the sound limiting state by the time the effect lever 28 is operated, it is possible to imagine that a big hit will occur after the operation, and the player's expectation can be further raised. Further, similarly to the above, the second operation promotion effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM 4 (the fixed reproduction position (elapsed time from the beginning of the BGM) differs depending on the fluctuation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the timing when the second operation promotion effect is performed by the music, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player according to the flow of the music.

On the other hand, for example, during the pre-reach production, there are times when a premier production suggesting the confirmation of a big hit is performed, and times when it is not performed. Even when the premiere production is performed, BGM1 is continuously output. Therefore, regardless of whether the premier production is performed or not, the production can proceed with the same rhythm during the pre-reach production, and the rhythm of the music and the progress of the production can be matched. Further, as described above, the premier production is started at a random playback position in the BGM1 when the BGM1 is flowing with a good rhythm, so that the production can be surprised and the interest is improved. Can be done.

Next, a case where the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the premier effect and the second operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect will be described.

FIG. 44 shows the BGM when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the premier effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the control of.

As shown in FIG. 44, the first operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the premier effect. The first operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 26, and is an effect with a lower expectation of a big hit than the second operation promotion effect. After the variation effect is started at the time point T0, for example, during the pre-reach effect, the first operation promotion effect is performed. Specifically, the first operation promotion effect is executed at the time point t5 (for example, 3 seconds before the time point t1) before the premier effect is executed.

In the first operation promotion effect, for example, an image imitating the effect button 26 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and an image showing the operation valid period of the effect button 26 is output. When the effect button 26 is pressed during the operation valid period, the premier effect is executed. If the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the subsequent premier effect may not be executed. Further, regardless of whether or not the effect button 26 is operated, the premier effect may be executed according to the elapse of the operation valid period.

During the first operation promotion effect, the effect button 26 itself may emit light by emitting light from the LED built in the effect button 26. Further, during the first operation promotion effect, the effect button 26 itself may vibrate by operating the vibrator (vibration motor) built in the effect button 26. When the effect button 26 vibrates during the first operation promotion effect, it may be more likely that the premier effect will be performed after the operation than when the effect button 26 does not vibrate during the first operation promotion effect.

During the execution of the first operation promotion effect, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. For example, the volume of the BGM 1 during the first operation promotion effect may be the same as before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, or may be lower than before the execution of the first operation promotion effect. Further, although the reproduction of the BGM1 is internally continued during the first operation promotion effect (although the reproduction position advances with the passage of time), the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0".

Further, during the first operation promotion effect, a first operation guidance sound that urges the player to operate the effect button 26 may be output. The first operation guidance sound may be a sound different from the second operation guidance sound. For example, the first operation guidance sound may be an electronic sound. Further, the first operation guidance sound may be a sound shorter than the second operation guidance sound. Further, the volume of the first operation guidance sound may be lower than the volume of the second operation guidance sound. Further, the first operation guidance sound may be the same sound as the second operation guidance sound. Further, while the first operation guidance sound may or may not be output, the second operation guidance sound may always be output.

The first operation promotion effect may be an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28. Further, as the first operation promotion effect, there are an effect of urging the operation of the effect button 26 and an effect of urging the player to operate the effect lever 28, and these may be selected by lottery. In this case, when the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, the premiere is performed after the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 26 as the first operation promotion effect. It may be configured so that the effect can be easily executed. When the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, the premier effect may be executed with a 100% probability.

In this way, the first operation promotion effect performed immediately before the premier effect is an effect that encourages the operation in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion effect performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect of the variable effect is. This is an effect that encourages an operation in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the pressing of the effect button 26 (first operation mode), and the second operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the operation of pulling the effect lever 28 (second operation mode). Further, for example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to press the effect button 26, and the second operation promotion effect causes the player to press and hold the effect button 26 (the button is kept pressed for a predetermined time). It may be a production for.

In this way, the BGM 1 is continuously output regardless of whether the first operation promotion effect is performed or not during the variation effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the first operation promotion effect is performed or the first operation promotion effect is not performed, the effect can be advanced with the same rhythm during the pre-reach effect, and the rhythm of the music and the progress of the effect can be adjusted. Can be matched. Further, the premier effect is started at a random reproduction position in BGM1, and the first operation promotion effect is also started at a random reproduction position in BGM1. Therefore, when the BGM1 is flowing in a good rhythm, the production can be given a surprise, and the interest can be improved.

On the other hand, the BGM 4 is stopped during the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final jackpot notification effect. As a result, the player can pay attention to the second operation promotion effect immediately before the final jackpot notification effect, and the player can concentrate on the operation of the effect lever 28. Further, when the sound is restricted during the second operation promotion effect (for example, during the operation valid period), the player can be concentrated by the operation. By setting the sound limiting state by the time the effect lever 28 is operated, it is possible to imagine that a big hit will occur after the operation, and the player's expectation can be further raised. Further, the second operation promotion effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM 4 (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the beginning. The predetermined time varies depending on the fluctuation pattern). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the timing when the second operation promotion effect is performed by the music, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player according to the flow of the music.

In the present embodiment, there are times when a notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit is performed and a case where the advance notice effect is not performed during the variable effect. Hereinafter, a case where a notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit is performed during the output of the BGM1 will be described.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the advance notice effect is executed while BGM1 is being output when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 45, the variation of the special symbol starts, and the pre-reach effect is performed. BGM1 is output during the pre-reach production. A notice effect may be executed at time t1 during the pre-reach effect. The notice production is a production that suggests the possibility of a big hit (expectation). There are a plurality of types of advance notice effects. For example, as a notice effect, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed, a dialogue advance notice effect in which a predetermined character emits a line, a step-up notice effect in which expectations are gradually increased, a notice effect using a decorative symbol 51, and a pseudo-continuous There is a notice, a notice effect using the movable character 7, and the like. Expectations for big hits differ depending on the type of advance notice. Further, as the advance notice effect, the changing effect during the change may be executed in which the changing display 53 changes. Further, the advance notice effect may be an effect that suggests a set value related to the jackpot probability.

The advance notice production may be performed during the N reach production, may be performed during the SPSP development production, or may be performed during the SPSP reach production. Further, the advance notice effect may be performed a plurality of times in one variable effect. For example, the advance notice effect may be performed at the start of the change of the special symbol and during the N reach effect. Not limited to these timings, the advance notice effect may be performed at any timing from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of fluctuation.

While the preview effect is being performed, the BGM1 is continuously played and output. For example, the volume of the BGM 1 during the advance notice effect may be the same as before and after the execution of the advance notice effect, or may be lower than before and after the execution of the advance notice effect. Further, although the reproduction of the BGM1 is internally continued during the advance notice effect (although the reproduction position advances with the passage of time), the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0". Further, during the advance notice production, for example, a character's voice or sound effect may be output. Even if the volume of BGM1 is lowered during the advance notice effect, the volume of BGM1 is restored after the advance notice effect. That is, the type and volume of BGM1 do not change before and after the advance notice effect. After the advance notice effect, the volume of the BGM1 may be lowered or raised, or a different type of BGM1 may be output.

Further, the volume of the BGM 1 during the advance notice effect may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the advance notice effect. For example, the higher the expectation of the advance notice effect, the lower or louder the volume of the BGM1 during the advance notice effect.

After the advance notice effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 45, the reach is established, the BGM1 is stopped, the N reach effect is started, and the BGM2 is output. After that, the BGM2 is stopped, the SPSP development effect is executed, and the SPSP reach effect is started. The output of BGM4 is started when the SPSP reach effect is started. Then, in the same manner as described above, the BGM 4 is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is executed at the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, and the jackpot notification effect is performed.

In this way, even when the advance notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit is executed, the BGM1 is continuously output as in the case where the advance notice effect is not executed. Further, regardless of whether the advance notice effect is executed or not, the BGM 4 is stopped in the final jackpot notification effect.

Therefore, the production can be advanced along the flow of music until the final jackpot notification production, and the continuity of the production can be maintained. On the other hand, by stopping the music in the final jackpot notification effect, the player's expectation can be raised and the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized.

It should be noted that a certain notice effect may be performed together with another notice effect, or may not be performed together with another notice effect. That is, a certain notice effect may be performed in combination with another notice effect, or may not be performed in combination with another notice effect. Here, in "a certain notice effect and another notice effect are performed together (a certain notice effect and another notice effect are combined)", another notice effect is executed during the execution of the certain notice effect. This includes the fact that another notice effect is executed after the execution of a certain notice effect, and that another notice effect is executed before the execution of a certain notice effect. That is, if the effect is performed in such a manner that a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect have some relation, one advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not necessarily have to be performed at the same time. For example, when the first character that is a part of the first notice effect is displayed during the first notice effect, and the second character indicating the second notice effect is displayed during the display of the first character. There may be times when it is not displayed. On the other hand, the second notice effect, which may be performed in combination with the first notice effect, is not performed during the jackpot notification effect. That is, the jackpot notification effect is not executed together with the second notice effect. Whether or not the first notice effect is combined with the second notice effect is determined by a lottery of the effect control unit 130. For example, the lottery for whether or not to execute the first notice effect and the lottery for whether or not to execute the second notice effect may be performed independently, or whether or not the first notice effect is executed. A lottery may be performed as to whether or not to execute the second notice effect based on the lottery result. The jackpot expectation may be the same or different depending on whether the first notice effect and the second notice effect are performed in combination or not in combination. For example, when the expectation level of the first notice effect is 10% and the expectation level of the second notice effect is 20%, the expectation level when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are performed in combination is , The higher expectation level (20%) of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, for example, the expectation level when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are combined is 30%. You may. On the contrary, depending on the combination of the advance notice effects, the degree of expectation may decrease. For example, when the expectation level of the first notice effect is 10% and the expectation level of the second notice effect is 20%, the expectation level when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are performed in combination. Is lower than the higher expectation (20%), and may be, for example, 15%.

Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the effect is performed using more effect means than those used in the advance notice effect. For example, in the advance notice effect, the effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 (the image displayed on), and in the jackpot notification effect, the liquid crystal display device 5, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the movable accessory 7 are used. An effect of notifying the jackpot may be performed. Further, in the advance notice effect, the effect is performed using the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 (sound from), and in the jackpot notification effect, the liquid crystal display device 5, the speaker 24, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, and the movable combination. An effect of notifying the jackpot may be performed using the object 7. In the jackpot notification effect, any effect may be performed regardless of the number of effect means, as long as the effect is more decorative than the advance notice effect.

Next, a case where the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the advance notice effect and the second operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect will be described.

FIG. 46 shows the BGM when the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the advance notice effect and the second operation promotion effect is executed immediately before the final jackpot notification effect when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the control of.

The second operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect lever 28. Since the second operation promotion effect is the same as the second operation promotion effect of FIG. 42, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 46, the first operation promotion effect may be executed immediately before the advance notice effect. The first operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that urges the player to operate the effect button 26, and has a lower expectation than the second operation promotion effect. After the variation effect is started at the time point T0, for example, during the pre-reach effect, the first operation promotion effect is performed. Specifically, the first operation promotion effect is executed at the time point t5 (for example, 3 seconds before the time point t1) before the advance notice effect is executed.

For example, in the first operation promotion effect, an image imitating the effect button 26 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and an image showing the operation valid period of the effect button 26 is output. When the effect button 26 is pressed during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is executed. If the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the subsequent advance notice effect may not be executed, or the advance notice effect may be executed according to the elapse of the operation valid period. For example, when it is determined that the advance notice effect having a relatively low expectation is executed, the advance notice effect may not be executed when the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation valid period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advance notice effect having a relatively high expectation is executed, when the effect button 26 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the advance notice effect is executed according to the elapse of the operation valid period. You may.

The first operation promotion effect of FIG. 46 may be the same effect as the first operation promotion effect of FIG. 44, or may be an effect of a different aspect. For example, when the premier effect of FIG. 44 is executed, the effect button 26 may emit light or vibrate in a specific mode in the first operation promotion effect. On the other hand, when the advance notice effect of FIG. 46 is executed, the effect button 26 does not emit light in a specific mode and does not need to vibrate in the first operation promotion effect.

During the execution of the first operation promotion effect, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. For example, the volume of the BGM 1 during the first operation promotion effect may be the same as before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, or may be lower than before the execution of the first operation promotion effect. Further, although the reproduction of the BGM1 is internally continued during the first operation promotion effect (although the reproduction position advances with the passage of time), the volume value of the BGM1 may be set to "0".

Further, during the first operation promotion effect, a first operation guidance sound that urges the player to operate the effect button 26 may be output. The first operation guidance sound may be a sound different from the second operation guidance sound. For example, during the first operation promotion effect, a sound effect (for example, an electronic sound) that prompts the operation of the effect button 26 is output, and during the second operation promotion effect, a different sound (for example, the voice of the character. , Etc.) may be output. Since the effect after the advance notice effect is the same as that in FIGS. 41 and 42, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the first operation guidance sound may be the same sound as the second operation guidance sound.

The first operation promotion effect executed immediately before the advance notice effect may be an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 28 in the same manner as the second operation promotion effect executed immediately before the jackpot notification effect. .. Further, as the first operation promotion effect, there are an effect of urging the operation of the effect button 26 and an effect of urging the player to operate the effect lever 28, and these may be selected by lottery. In this case, when the effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, it is expected after that, as compared with the case where the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 26 is executed as the first operation promotion effect. It may be configured so that a high degree of advance notice effect can be easily executed. Further, when an effect for urging the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the first operation promotion effect, there is a 100% probability that a notice effect with a high degree of expectation may be executed thereafter.

The first operation promotion effect executed immediately before the advance notice effect is an effect that encourages the operation in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion effect executed immediately before the jackpot notification effect is different from the first operation mode. This is an effect that encourages operation in the second operation mode. For example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the pressing of the effect button 26 (first operation mode), and the second operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the operation of pulling the effect lever 28 (second operation mode). Further, for example, the first operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to press the effect button 26, and the second operation promotion effect is for causing the player to press and hold the effect button 26 (keeping the button pressed). It may be a production.

Even in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 46, the BGM is continuously played during the first operation promotion effect, and when the second operation promotion effect is executed, the BGM that has been output until immediately before is stopped. The same effect as described with reference can be achieved.

Next, the control of the BGM when the operation promotion effect is performed before the SPSP development effect will be described.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. FIG. 47 shows the flow of the variation effect when the jackpot variation pattern (OP4-1 to OP4-3) including the N reach effect and the SPSP reach effect is selected.

As shown in FIG. 47, the variation of the special symbol is started at the time point T0, and the pre-reach effect is performed. BGM1 is output during the pre-reach production. The first operation promotion effect may be executed during the pre-reach effect, and the first effect (the above notice effect or the premier effect) may be executed if the operation is performed during the first operation promotion effect. The BGM1 is continuously played even during the execution of the first operation promotion effect and the first effect. As described above, during the execution of the first effect, the volume of BGM1 may or may not be lowered, and the playback of BGM1 is continued, but the volume value of BGM1 is set to "0". May be done. Further, during the execution of the first effect, other sounds (sound effects and character sounds) different from BGM1 may be output.

Subsequently, the reach is established at the time point T1. When the reach is established, BGM1 is stopped. When the reach is established and the N reach effect is started, BGM2 is output.

After the N reach effect is started, the third operation promotion effect is performed at the time point t6. The third operation promotion effect is an effect performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is executed (for example, 4 seconds before), and is an effect that urges the player to operate the operation means (effect button 26 or effect lever 28). .. The third operation promotion effect may be an effect having a higher expectation than the first operation promotion effect and a lower expectation than the second operation promotion effect. For example, in the third operation promotion effect, an image imitating the effect button 26 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47, the BGM 2 is stopped at the timing when the third operation promotion effect is performed. The reproduction of BGM2 is also stopped internally. During this third operation promotion effect, a third operation guidance sound that prompts the player to operate the operation means may be output. For example, the third operation guidance sound is a sound effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 26, and may be a sound different from (or the same as) that of the first operation guidance sound. Further, the third operation guidance sound may be output at the same volume as the first operation guidance sound, or may be output at a louder (or smaller) volume than the first operation guidance sound.

When the effect button 26 is operated during the third operation promotion effect, or when the operation valid period in the third operation promotion effect elapses, the SPSP development effect is performed (time point T2). As described above, the SPSP development effect differs depending on the SPSP reach effect to be executed, and depends on the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the SPSP development sound is output during the SPSP development production. In addition, BGM2 remains stopped even during the SPSP development production.

The blackout effect may be performed during the third operation promotion effect or the SPSP development effect. For example, as a blackout effect during the third operation promotion effect, a button image 83 imitating the effect button 26 and an effective period image 84 (described later) indicating an operation effective period are displayed relatively brightly, and background images other than these are displayed. Etc. may be displayed relatively darkly. In addition, a blackout effect may be performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect. During the blackout effect, a sound limiting state (a state in which no sound is output or a state in which only a relatively small sound is output) may be set. When a prize is given to the starting port of the game ball in this sound-restricted state, a predetermined winning sound corresponding to the winning may not be output or may be output. In addition, when there is a prize at the start port of the game ball in the sound restricted state, the prize sound may or may not be output depending on the jackpot expectation of holding the special symbol judgment related to the prize. May be good.

When the SPSP development production is completed, the SPSP reach production is started (time point T3). BGM4 is output during the SPSP reach production. At the time t2 at the end of the SPSP reach effect, the above-mentioned second operation promotion effect may be performed. For example, the BGM 4 stops immediately before the start of the second operation promotion effect. Further, the second operation guidance sound is output during the second operation promotion effect.

Then, when the effect lever 28 is operated during the second operation promotion effect, or when the operation valid period in the second operation promotion effect elapses, the winning notification effect (big hit notification effect or reach loss notification effect) is performed ( Time point T4).

As the third operation promotion effect, an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 28 may be executed. Further, as the third operation promotion effect, either an effect of urging the operation of the effect button 26 or an effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 28 may be selected and executed by lottery. When the effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect (and SPSP reach effect) with higher expectation is higher than when the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 26 is executed. May be easy to perform. For example, when an effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is 80% according to the operation for the effect lever 28 during the third operation promotion effect. It may be executed and the SPSP development effect A or B may be executed at a rate of 20%. Further, when an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 26 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is 20% according to the operation for the effect button 26 during the third operation promotion effect. It may be executed and the SPSP development effect A or B may be executed at a rate of 80%. Further, when an effect for urging the operation of the effect lever 28 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is 100% according to the operation for the effect lever 28 during the third operation promotion effect. It may be executed. Further, when the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 26 is executed as the third operation promotion effect, the SPSP development effect C is not executed in response to the operation of the effect button 26 during the third operation promotion effect, and 100 The SPSP development effect A or B may be executed at a rate of%.

The third operation promotion effect (and SPSP development effect) may be started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM (for example, 20 seconds from the beginning of the BGM). This fixed reproduction position may differ depending on the fluctuation pattern. For example, when the N reach effect is started, the BGM 2 may be started from the beginning, the third operation promotion effect may be executed at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM 2, and the SPSP development effect may be started according to the operation. In this way, by starting the third operation promotion effect and the SPSP development effect at a fixed playback position in the BGM, the player can be made to recognize the timing when the SPSP development effect is performed by the music, and the flow of music can be changed. The expectations of the player can be increased accordingly. The third operation promotion effect may be started at a random reproduction position in the BGM 2 (for example, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, and 15 seconds from the beginning of the BGM).

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing another example of BGM control when the third operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the SPSP development effect is performed when the result of the special symbol determination is a big hit. In FIG. 48, the description of the same portion as in FIG. 47 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 48, the third operation promotion effect is started at the time point t6 during the N reach effect. In this case, BGM2 is continuously output even during the third operation promotion effect. When the third operation guidance sound for prompting the player to operate is output during the third operation promotion effect, the volume of the BGM2 during the third operation promotion effect may be lowered.

In the example shown in FIG. 48, the SPSP development effect is performed and the BGM2 is stopped according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect or when the operation valid period of the third operation promotion effect has elapsed. (Time point T2). After that, the same effect as in FIG. 47 is performed.

Although the various effect patterns of the variable effect have been described above, each of the above effect patterns is merely an example, and some of the effects may or may not be executed in each effect pattern. For example, in FIG. 46, the first operation promotion effect may not be executed, and only the second operation promotion effect may be executed. Further, in FIG. 46, the first operation promotion effect may be executed, and the second operation promotion effect may not be executed.

Further, for example, in FIG. 47, the second operation promotion effect may not be executed and the first and third operation promotion effects may be executed, or the first operation promotion effect may not be executed and the first operation promotion effect may be executed. The third and second operation promotion effects may be executed, or the first and second operation promotion effects may not be executed and only the third operation promotion effect may be executed.

(Specific production example)
Next, a specific production example of the production by the above-mentioned production pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47 will be described.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 44, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. 49.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), when the variation of the special symbol starts, the start effect of starting the variation of the decorative symbol 51 is performed. If the BGM1 is not output immediately before the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the image / sound control unit 140 starts playing the BGM1 in response to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the BGM1 is output from the speaker 24. NS. Further, if the BGM1 is output at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the output BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output.

Next, the first operation promotion effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 51 (FIG. 49 (B), time point t5 in FIG. 44). For example, as the first operation promotion effect, a button image 80 imitating the effect button 26 and an effective period image 81 showing the operation valid period of the effect button 26 are displayed. The valid period image 81 is an image showing the remaining time of the operation valid period. For example, the white horizontally long image showing the remaining time decreases with the passage of time to display the remaining time. When this first operation promotion effect is executed, a first operation guidance sound that urges the player to press the effect button 26 is output. For example, an electronic sound may be output as the first operation guidance sound. Further, during the operation valid period, the effect button 26 itself may be made to emit light by emitting the LED built in the effect button 26.

While the first operation promotion effect is being performed, the BGM 1 is continuously reproduced and output. When the first operation guidance sound is output, the volume of the BGM1 may be lower than before the first operation guidance sound is output. In addition, during this first operation promotion effect, for example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11, a predetermined winning sound indicating the winning of the game ball in the starting port may be output as described above. be. Even in this case, the BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. The volume of the BGM1 may be the same depending on whether the predetermined winning sound is output or not, and when the predetermined winning sound is output, the volume of the BGM1 is lowered. You may.

When an operation is performed on the effect button 26 during the first operation promotion effect, the premier effect is executed in response to the operation (FIG. 49 (C), time point t1 in FIG. 44). For example, as a premier effect, the premier character 60 is displayed, and the dialogue 61 (for example, the characters "Congratulations" suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot) emitted by the premier character 60 is displayed. Further, along with the display of the dialogue 61, the voice of the premier character 60 (for example, the voice of "Congratulations") is output from the speaker 24. At this time, BGM1 is continuously reproduced. For example, the playback of BGM1 is continued, but the volume value of BGM1 is temporarily set to "0" (mute). Further, the volume of the voice of the premier character 60 is higher than the volume of the BGM 1 before the execution of the premier effect. Therefore, the player can easily hear the voice of the premier character 60. The volume value of BGM1 may be set to a value larger than "0" during the execution of the premier effect. For example, the volume value of BGM1 may be set to "5" before the execution of the premier effect and the first operation promotion effect, and the volume value of BGM1 may be lowered to "3" during the execution of the premier effect, or "5". May remain.

A vibration motor is provided inside the effect button 26, and the effect button 26 may be vibrated by using the vibration motor when the first operation promotion effect and / or the premier effect is executed. By vibrating the vibration motor during the first operation promotion effect, the player can be expected to perform a highly expected effect before operating the effect button 26.

Then, when the premier effect is completed, the premier character 60 disappears from the screen, and the volume of the BGM1 also returns to that before the first operation promotion effect and the premier effect are executed (FIG. 49 (D)). Since the reproduction of the BGM1 is continued during the execution of the premier effect of FIG. 49C, the reproduction position of the BGM1 advances with the passage of time. Therefore, when the premiere production is completed and the volume of the BGM1 is restored, the BGM1 is ahead of the premier production before the execution. For example, when the production time of the first operation promotion effect and the premier effect is 5 seconds and the playback position of the BGM1 is 5 seconds after the beginning of the BGM1 immediately before the start of the first operation promotion effect, the premier effect is performed. The reproduction position of the BGM1 at the end of is a position 10 seconds from the beginning of the BGM1.

When a predetermined time elapses from the end of the premiere production, decorative symbols of the same type (for example, "8" symbol) are temporarily stopped in the left and right regions to establish reach (FIG. 49 (E), time point T1 in FIG. 44). ). When the reach is established, BGM1 is stopped and the reach establishment sound is output.

When the reach is established, the N reach effect is performed, BGM2 is output, and the decorative symbol fluctuates in the middle region (FIG. 49 (F)). BGM2 is continuously output during the N reach production.

During the N reach production, a development suggestion production suggesting the development to the SPSP reach production may be performed (Fig. 49 (G)). For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (G), as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, the “7” symbol indicating loss slowly moves from the top to the bottom of the screen, passes through the middle region, and then SPSP reach. A state in which the SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development of the production slowly moves from the top to the bottom of the screen is displayed.

Then, the SPSP development suggestion symbol is stopped as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, and the SPSP development effect indicating that the SPSP development suggestion symbol is developed is performed (FIG. 49 (H), time point T2 in FIG. 44). When the SPSP development suggestion symbol 51b is stopped, the BGM2 is stopped and an SPSP development sound suggesting the development of the SPSP reach effect is output.

In the screen shown in FIG. 49 (H), as the intermediate decorative symbol, if the "8" symbol stops, it becomes a big hit, and if the number symbols other than the "8" symbol stop, it becomes a loss. In addition, when the interior decoration pattern moves slowly and moves at high speed again, it develops into an SP reach effect.

Following FIG. 49 (H), the title of the SPSP reach effect is displayed (FIG. 50 (I)). In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of SPSP reach effects, and in FIG. 50 (I), titles corresponding to the SPSP reach effects to be executed are displayed. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed. At this time, images of characters and people appearing in the SPSP reach effect may be displayed. Further, the sound corresponding to the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed may be output from the speaker 24.

When switching from the screen of FIG. 49 (H) to the screen of FIG. 50 (I), the left and right decorative symbols move to the left and right of the upper area of the screen while being reduced. Further, between FIGS. 49 (A) and 49 (H), each decorative symbol is displayed in a manner in which an image of a predetermined character is attached to a number. When the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), the left and right decorative symbols are displayed relatively small on the left and right of the upper area of the screen, and the image of a predetermined character is displayed as a number. It is displayed in the mode without.

Next, after a switching image (not shown) indicating switching to the SPSP reach effect is displayed, the SPSP reach effect is started (FIG. 50 (J), time point T3 in FIG. 44). During the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach moving image effect is displayed in the central area of the screen. When the SPSP reach effect is started, the output of the BGM 4 is started from the speaker 24. The BGM 4 has a predetermined reproduction time, and the reproduction is started from the beginning. Further, different BGM4s are prepared for each type of SPSP reach effect, and the BGM4 corresponding to the type of SPSP reach effect to be executed is output. During the SPSP reach production, BGM4 is continuously output.

At the end of the SPSP reach effect, the second operation promotion effect is started (FIG. 50 (K), time point t2 in FIG. 44). At the time when the second operation promotion effect is started (or immediately before the start), the BGM 4 is stopped. The predetermined period after the start of the second operation promotion effect is the operation preparation period, and in the operation preparation period, it is displayed that the image imitating the effect lever 28 is gradually completed. For example, in response to the start of the second operation promotion effect, a left lever partial image 91 that imitates a part of the left side of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen (FIG. 50 (K)).

Subsequently, in the operation preparation period, in addition to the left lever partial image 91, a right lever partial image 92 that imitates a part of the right side of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen (FIG. 50 (L)).

Next, the central lever partial image 93 imitating the central portion of the effect lever 28 is displayed on the screen, and the image imitating the effect lever 28 is completed (FIG. 50 (M), immediately before the time point t3 in FIG. 43). Specifically, immediately before the end of the operation preparation period (immediately before the start of the operation valid period), a completed image 90 imitating the entire effect lever 28 is displayed, and a character urging the player to operate the effect lever 28 ( For example, the text "pull the lever") is displayed. Further, immediately before the end of the operation preparation period, the speaker 24 outputs a second operation guidance sound (for example, a sound of "pull the lever") prompting the player to operate the effect lever 28. The second operation guidance sound may be a sound longer than the first operation guidance sound, or may be a sound louder than the first operation guidance sound.

Then, the operation valid period in which the operation of the effect lever 28 is valid starts, and the valid period image 95 showing the operation valid period is displayed (FIG. 50 (N), time point t3 in FIG. 43).

The display of the completed image 90 imitating the entire effect lever 28, the display of the character "pull the lever" prompting the operation of the effect lever 28, the display of the valid period image 95, and the output of the second operation guidance sound are displayed. , It may be performed at the same timing, or it may be performed at different timings. For example, the display of these images and the output of the second operation guidance sound may be performed at the beginning of the operation valid period.

The operation valid period related to the second operation promotion effect is longer than the operation valid period related to the first operation promotion effect (FIG. 49 (B)). Therefore, the valid period image 95 shown in FIG. 50 (N) may be longer in the lateral direction than the valid period image 81 shown in FIG. 49 (B).

When the operation valid period of the second operation promotion effect starts, the sound is restricted so that neither the BGM nor the second operation guidance sound is output. For example, during the operation valid period, there may be a silent state in which no sound is output. Further, during the operation valid period, only a relatively quiet sound may be output. For example, during the operation valid period, the valid period image 95 may be used to display how the remaining time of the operation valid period decreases, and a relatively small sound effect may be output as the remaining time decreases.

Then, the jackpot notification effect is performed according to the operation of the effect lever 28 during the operation valid period or the elapse of the operation valid period without the operation of the effect lever 28. (FIG. 50 (O), time point T4 in FIG. 44). Specifically, as the intermediate decorative symbol 51b, the "8" symbol of the same type as the left and right decorative symbols stops, and the movable accessory 7 advances to the central region of the screen. In addition, a jackpot notification sound for notifying the jackpot is output.

After the jackpot notification effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the movable accessory 7 is retracted to the initial position, and three decorative symbols 51 of the same type are temporarily stopped in the central region of the screen, and then the main stop is performed (FIG. FIG. 50 (P)).

Next, a specific production example of the production pattern shown in FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 46, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Hereinafter, in FIG. 51, only the parts different from those in FIG. 49 will be described, and the description of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the first operation promotion effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol 51 (FIG. 51 (B), time point t5 in FIG. 46). Specifically, as the first operation promotion effect, a button image 80 imitating the effect button 26 and an effective period image 81 showing the operation valid period of the effect button 26 are displayed. At this time, the first operation guidance sound for urging the player to press the effect button 26 is output. For example, an electronic sound may be output as the first operation guidance sound. Here, the same sound as the first operation guidance sound (FIG. 49 (B)) in the first operation promotion effect immediately before the premier effect may be output, or a different sound may be output.

While the first operation promotion effect is being performed, the BGM 1 is continuously reproduced and output. While the first operation guidance sound is being output, the volume of the BGM 1 may be the same as before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, or may be reduced. The same as in FIG. 49, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 during the first operation promotion effect.

When an operation is performed on the effect button 26 during the first operation promotion effect, the advance notice effect is executed in response to the operation (FIG. 51 (C), time point t1 in FIG. 46). For example, as a notice effect, a predetermined character 65 is displayed, and a line 66 (for example, a character of "chance" suggesting the possibility of a big hit) emitted by the character 65 is displayed. Further, along with the display of the dialogue 66, the voice of the predetermined character 65 (the voice of "chance") is output from the speaker 24. At this time, BGM1 is continuously reproduced and output. Specifically, the volume of the BGM1 during the advance notice effect is lower than the volume of the BGM1 before the execution of the first operation promotion effect and the advance notice effect. Further, the volume of the voice of the predetermined character 65 is higher than the volume of the BGM 1 before the execution of the advance notice effect and during the execution of the advance notice effect. Therefore, the player can easily hear the voice of the predetermined character 65.

In addition, there are multiple types of advance notice effects, and the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the type of advance notice effects. When executing the advance notice effect, different sounds may be output depending on the degree of expectation of the advance notice effect. In this case, the volume of the BGM 1 during the advance notice effect may be lowered according to the degree of expectation of the advance notice effect.

Further, the volume of the BGM 1 does not have to be lowered while the first operation promotion effect and the advance notice effect are being executed.

Further, depending on the degree of expectation of the advance notice effect to be executed, the effect button 26 may be vibrated by using a vibration motor when the first operation promotion effect is executed and / or when the advance notice effect is executed. ..

Then, when the advance notice effect is completed, the predetermined character 65 disappears from the screen, and the volume of the BGM1 also returns to that before the execution of the first operation promotion effect and the advance notice effect (FIG. 51 (D)). That is, the volume of the BGM 1 returns to the volume before the execution of the first operation promotion effect and the advance notice effect. For example, the volume value of BGM1 is set to "5" before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, and the volume value of BGM1 is reduced to "3" during the execution of the advance notice effect (during the output of the sound of the predetermined character 65). After the advance notice effect is completed (after the sound of the predetermined character 65 is output), the volume value of the BGM 1 is set to "5". Since the reproduction of the BGM1 is continued during the execution of the advance notice effect of FIG. 51 (C), the reproduction position of the BGM1 advances with the passage of time. Therefore, when the advance notice effect is completed and the volume of the BGM1 is restored, the BGM1 is ahead of the time before the advance notice effect is executed.

Since the effects of FIGS. 51 (D) and later are the same as those of FIGS. 49 (D) and later (FIGS. 49 (D) to 50 (P)), description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a specific production example of the production pattern shown in FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific effect of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 47, and is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. Hereinafter, in FIG. 52, only the portion different from FIG. 51 will be described, and the description of the same portion will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (D), the start effect, the first operation promotion effect, and the advance notice effect are produced in this order. Following FIG. 52 (D), reach is established, BGM1 is stopped (time point T1 in FIG. 47), and N reach effect is performed (FIG. 52 (E)). BGM2 is output at the timing when the N reach effect is started.

During the N reach effect, a third operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 26 may be performed (FIG. 52 (F), time point t6 in FIG. 47). Specifically, as the third operation promotion effect, a button image 83 imitating the effect button 26 and an effective period image 84 showing the operation valid period of the effect button 26 are displayed. The button image 83 displayed here is a larger image than the button image 80 in the first operation promotion effect of FIG. 52 (B). Further, the button image 83 may be an image having a different color and pattern from the button image 80. The button image 83 may be the same image as the button image 80, or may be the same size as the button image 80. In addition, an image prompting the pressing of the effect button 26 (for example, the characters "press the button") is displayed on the screen. The third operation promotion effect may be an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 28.

When the third operation promotion effect is executed, the BGM2 output during the N reach effect is stopped. Specifically, the reproduction of BGM2 is also stopped internally. Further, when the third operation promotion effect is executed, a third operation guidance sound for prompting the pressing of the effect button 26 is output. For example, as the third operation guidance sound, a voice prompting the pressing of the effect button 26 (for example, a voice saying "press the button") may be output.

During the third operation promotion effect, the valid period image 84 changes according to the remaining time of the operation valid period (FIG. 52 (G)). Further, during the third operation promotion effect, the sound restriction state may be set in which neither the BGM nor the third operation guidance sound is output. For example, during the third operation promotion effect, the sound may be silenced. Further, during the third operation promotion effect, only a relatively small sound may be output.

Then, the SPSP development effect is performed in response to the operation of the effect button 26 during the third operation promotion effect or in response to the elapse of the operation valid period (FIG. 52 (H), FIG. At the time of 47 T2). For example, an SPSP development suggestion symbol suggesting the development of the SPSP reach effect is displayed in the central area of the screen. In addition, an SPSP development sound suggesting the development of SPSP reach production is output. In addition, in FIG. 52 (H), an image different from the SPSP development suggestion symbol displayed in FIGS. 49 (H) and 51 (H) may be displayed.

Since the effects of FIGS. 52 (H) and later are the same as those of FIGS. 49 (H) and 49 (H) to 50 (P), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 52, the BGM2 is stopped when the third operation promotion effect is started, but the BGM2 is not stopped when the third operation promotion effect is started, and the third operation promotion effect is not stopped. BGM1 may be continuously output inside. In this case, BGM2 is stopped in response to the start of the SPSP development effect shown in FIG. 52 (H).

Further, the blackout effect may be performed when the third operation promotion effect is started or when the SPSP development effect is started. An example of the blackout effect will be described below.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed in response to an operation during the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 53, only the portion different from FIG. 52 will be described, and the description of the same portion will be omitted.

In FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (F), the same effect as in FIGS. 52 (A) to 52 (F) is performed. In FIG. 53 (F), the third operation promotion effect is performed, and the operation of the effect button 26 is urged. When the third operation promotion effect is started, BGM2 is stopped. When the operation of the effect button 26 is performed during the operation valid period of the third operation promotion effect, or when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 26 being performed, the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 53 (G)). For example, in the blackout effect, a black image is displayed on the entire screen, and the entire screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 becomes dark. During the blackout production, the sound is restricted. For example, during the blackout effect, the sound may be silenced, or only a relatively small sound may be output.

Even when the blackout effect is performed, the fourth symbol 55 is displayed on the screen. The fourth symbol 55 is displayed small in a predetermined area (for example, lower right) of the screen even while the blackout effect is being performed. That is, the fourth symbol 55 is always displayed in a variable manner during the fluctuation of the special symbol. The fourth symbol 55 is displayed in the same display mode (brightness and size) as before the blackout effect even during the blackout effect, and does not become dark like a background image or the like. Even after the blackout effect, the display mode of the fourth symbol 55 does not change. The fourth symbol 55 may be displayed not by the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, but by, for example, an LED display device provided around the screen.

The decorative symbol 51 may also be displayed in the same display mode (brightness and size) as before the blackout effect during the blackout effect, as in the case of the fourth symbol 55.

Further, the BGM2 may be continuously output during the third operation promotion effect, and the BGM2 may be stopped in response to the start of the blackout effect shown in FIG. 53 (G).

Then, when the blackout effect is completed, the SPSP development effect suggesting the development to the SPSP reach effect is performed (FIG. 53 (H)). Since the effects of FIGS. 53 (H) and later are the same as those of FIGS. 49 (H) and 49 (H) to 50 (P), the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, a modified example of the blackout effect before the SPSP development effect is performed will be described. FIG. 54 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed immediately before the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 54, only the screen views after FIG. 53 (E) are shown.

As shown in FIG. 54, the reach is established and the N reach effect is started (FIG. 54 (E)). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the N reach effect, the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 54 (F)). At the timing when this blackout effect is performed, the BGM2 is stopped, and a sound limiting state (a state in which there is no sound or a state in which only a relatively small sound is output) is set. After the blackout effect is performed, the third operation promotion effect is started (FIG. 54 (G)). During the third operation promotion effect, the BGM 2 remains stopped and the third operation guidance sound is output. Then, the SPSP development effect is performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect (FIG. 54 (H)). The production after FIG. 54 (H) is the same as that after FIG. 49 (H) (FIGS. 49 (H) to 50 (P)).

In this way, the third operation promotion effect may be performed after the blackout effect is performed. In this case, the BGM 2 may be stopped at the timing when the blackout effect is performed.

FIG. 55 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a blackout effect is performed during the third operation promotion effect. In FIG. 55, only the screen views after FIG. 53 (E) are shown.

As shown in FIG. 55, the reach is established and the N reach effect is started (FIG. 55 (E)). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the N reach effect, the third operation promotion effect is performed and the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 55 (F), time point t6). For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the button image 83 and the valid period image 84 as the third operation promotion effect are displayed relatively brightly, while the images other than these are darkened. Further, at the timing when the third operation promotion effect and the blackout effect are started, the BGM2 is stopped, and a sound limiting state (a state in which there is no sound or a state in which only a relatively small sound is output) is set. In the screen of FIG. 55 (F), any of the background image, the decorative symbol 51, the hold display 52, and the changing display 53 may be hidden, and the background image, the decorative symbol 51, and the hold display 52 may be hidden. , And any of the changing display 53 may be displayed dark. Further, while the decorative symbol 51 is hidden or displayed darkly, the hold display 52 and the changing display 53 may remain displayed (the brightness is the same as before the blackout).

Then, the SPSP development effect is performed according to the operation during the third operation promotion effect (FIG. 55 (G)). The production after FIG. 55 (G) is the same as that after FIG. 49 (H) (FIGS. 49 (H) to 50 (P)).

In this way, the BGM 2 may be stopped at the timing when the third operation promotion effect and the blackout effect are performed.

FIG. 56 is a modification of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the blackout effect is performed without the third operation promotion effect and the SPSP reach effect is developed. In FIG. 56, only the screen views after FIG. 53 (E) are shown.

As shown in FIG. 56, the reach is established and the N reach effect is started (FIG. 56 (E)). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the N reach effect, the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 56 (F)). At the timing when this blackout effect is started, the BGM2 is stopped, and a sound limiting state (a state in which there is no sound or a state in which only a relatively small sound is output) is set.

Then, after the blackout effect is performed, the SPSP development effect is performed (FIG. 56 (G)). The production after FIG. 56 (G) is the same as that after FIG. 49 (H) (FIGS. 49 (H) to 50 (P)).

As described above, various production patterns have been described, but these are merely examples, and various production patterns may be produced in addition to those described above.

For example, in the variation effect (variation pattern OP1-1-2, variation pattern HP1-1-2 based on the variation pattern HP1-1-2) in which the N reach effect is performed, the above-mentioned first operation promotion effect, advance notice effect, and premier effect are performed. May be good. Then, the BGM during these productions may be controlled as described above. Further, in the variable effect (variable pattern OP2-1 to 3 and the variable effect based on the variable pattern HP2-13) in which the N reach effect and the SP reach effect are performed, the first operation promotion effect, the advance notice effect, and the premier effect described above are performed. , The third operation promotion effect, the SP development effect, and the second operation promotion effect may be performed. Further, there may be an effect pattern in which the SP development effect is performed after the third operation promotion effect. Then, the BGM during these productions may be controlled as described above.

Further, in the variation effect (variation pattern OP3-1 to 3 and variation effect based on the variation pattern HP3-1 to 3) in which the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are performed, the above-mentioned first operation promotion effect, A notice effect, a premier effect, a third operation promotion effect, an SP development effect, and a second operation promotion effect may be performed. Then, the BGM during these productions may be controlled as described above.

In addition, there is a variable effect in which the jackpot notification effect is performed without the reach effect, and in such a variable effect, the first operation promotion effect, the advance notice effect, the premier effect, and the second operation promotion effect before the big hit notification effect are performed. It may be done. Then, the BGM during these productions may be controlled as described above.

For example, there is a hitting effect as an example in which a big hit notification effect is performed without performing a reach effect. In the bump effect, the three decorative symbols (decorative symbols including numbers and character images) start to fluctuate, and suddenly, three similar decorative symbols are aligned and a big hit is notified without performing the reach effect. That is, in the bumping effect, the same type of decorative symbols are stopped on the left and right to notify the establishment of reach, and the reach effect is not performed as a medium decorative symbol, which is expected to stop the same type of decorative symbols on the left and right. Suddenly, a big hit is announced. For example, in the bump effect, three decorative symbols of the same type stop at the same time. When the bumping effect is performed, the BGM that has been output before the execution of the bumping effect may be stopped (at the same time as the execution) according to the execution of the bumping effect. On the contrary, when the collision effect is performed, the BGM that has been output before the execution of the collision effect does not have to be stopped according to the execution of the collision effect (at the same time as the execution). In this case, the BGM may be continuously output even after the collision effect is started, or the BGM may be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the collision effect. The abduction effect is executed when a variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, 20 seconds) is selected. When the abrupt effect is performed, the premier effect is likely to be executed. For example, the execution probability of the premier effect is higher than when the fluctuation patterns OP4-1 to 3 and OP3-1 to 3 having a relatively long fluctuation time are selected. Is high. Further, when the bumping effect is performed, the premier effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

The bumping effect may include an effect in which the three decorative patterns are aligned immediately after the reach is established. In this case, during the reach when the bumping effect is performed, the decorative symbol may have the same mode as during the N reach effect (a mode that is not reduced and includes a character), or may have a different mode. There may be. Further, during the reach when the bumping effect is performed, the same normal background image as before the reach may be displayed. Further, during the reach when the bumping effect is performed, the same BGM as before the reach may be output, or the same BGM as during the N reach effect may be output. That is, the hitting effect may be an effect that becomes a big hit without developing into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect. In this case, it can be said that the hitting effect is a production that becomes a big hit from the N reach production, but it may be exactly the same production as the production that becomes a big hit from the N reach production, or a production that becomes a big hit from the N reach production. May be a production with a short fluctuation time, or may be a production with a longer fluctuation time than a production that becomes a big hit from the N reach production.

Further, suggestions suggesting these effects before the above-mentioned first operation promotion effect, notice effect, premier effect, third operation promotion effect, SP development effect, SPSP development effect, second operation promotion effect, etc. are executed. The production may be performed.

In addition, in the above, each of the above effects was performed during one change of the special symbol, and the control of BGM during the production was described. Each of the above effects may be performed over a plurality of variations of the special symbol. For example, based on the result of the pre-determination, a continuous effect over a variation of a plurality of special symbols is performed. BGM is output in continuous production. Further, the first operation promotion effect, the advance notice effect, the premier effect, and the third operation promotion effect described above may be executed during the continuous effect, and the BGM may be continuously output during the execution of these effects. Further, during the continuous production of the first aspect, a development effect that develops into the continuous effect of the second aspect, which has a higher expectation than the first aspect, is performed, and when the development effect is executed, the BGM being output is stopped. You may. Further, the operation promotion effect for encouraging the player's operation may be performed before the development effect, and the BGM may be stopped when the operation promotion effect is executed.

Further, in the above, an example in which a blackout effect is performed when developing into an SPSP reach effect has been described, but not limited to the blackout effect, background images, decorative patterns, etc. are made difficult to see or invisible (hidden). ) Any production may be performed as long as it is a production. For example, a whiteout effect may be performed in which a white image is displayed on the entire screen. Further, for example, by displaying a predetermined image (for example, an image imitating a door, a shutter, etc.) covering at least a part of the background image on the foremost layer, at least a part of the background image is concealed. May be done. In addition, a freeze effect may be performed in which the movement of the entire screen is stopped. During the freeze effect, the movement of the image displayed on the screen is stopped, the BGM is also stopped (or paused), and the sound is restricted. When the freeze effect is completed, the BGM may be reproduced from the beginning and output, or may be reproduced and output from the reproduction position immediately before the freeze effect. Further, during the freeze effect, the BGM is played internally, but the volume value may be set to "0", and the volume value may be restored when the freeze effect ends.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the BGM is output during the variation effect according to the variation of the special symbol. The gaming machine of the present embodiment has a first effect (notice effect, premier effect, first operation promotion effect, etc.) and a second effect (big hit notification effect, second operation promotion effect, etc.) during one special symbol change. SPSP development effect, third operation promotion effect, etc.) can be executed. When the first effect (preliminary effect, premier effect, etc.) is executed, the BGM is continuously played and output during the first effect. On the other hand, when the second effect is executed, the BGM is stopped.

As a result, the effect can be advanced in accordance with the BGM regardless of whether the first effect is executed or not during the variable effect. Further, since the BGM is stopped when the second effect is executed, the second effect can be emphasized and the player's attention can be directed to the second effect. For example, when the jackpot notification effect is performed as the second effect, the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized. Since the BGM is stopped immediately before the jackpot notification effect is performed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further increased. Further, when the SPSP development effect is performed as the second effect, the SPSP development effect can be emphasized.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the advance notice effect or the premier effect is executed, and the BGM is continuously output even during the first operation promotion effect. Therefore, the effect can be advanced according to the BGM regardless of whether the first operation promotion effect is executed or not.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first effect (notice effect, premier effect, first operation promotion effect) may be performed when the first time has elapsed from the start of BGM playback, or the second time has elapsed. Sometimes it happens when you do. That is, the first effect is started at a random reproduction position in the BGM. On the other hand, the second effect (big hit notification effect, second operation promotion effect, etc.) is started at a fixed third time from the start of BGM reproduction. That is, the second effect is started at a fixed reproduction position in the BGM.

As a result, for example, since the jackpot notification effect is started at a fixed playback position in the BGM, the player can predict the timing at which the jackpot notification effect is performed by the music, and the player's expectations are expected as the music progresses. Can be enhanced. On the other hand, since the advance notice production and the premiere production are started at random playback positions in the BGM, it is not possible to predict when they will occur, and the production can be surprised and the interest can be improved. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fixed third time differs depending on the fluctuation pattern. For example, when a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected, the third time is relatively long, and when a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is selected, the third time is relatively long. short. In this way, since the fixed position where the BGM stops differs depending on the fluctuation time, the player can recognize the length of the fluctuation time (that is, the degree of expectation) depending on how far the music has progressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the type of BGM during the SPSP reach effect differs depending on the variation pattern, and the type of BGM during the pre-reach effect differs depending on the stage (effect mode). Therefore, it is possible to increase the pattern of the combination of the BGM during the pre-reach production and the BGM during the SPSP reach production, and it is possible to give diversity to the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first effect (notice effect, premier effect, etc.) is performed using a predetermined number of effect means (liquid crystal display device 5, board lamp 25), and the second effect (big hit notification effect, etc.) is performed. ) Is produced by using more than a predetermined number of effect means (liquid crystal display device 5, panel lamp 25, movable accessory 7). For example, in the final jackpot notification production of the variable production, a relatively flashy production is performed using more production means, so that the interest is improved. On the other hand, in the case of performing a premier production in the middle of a variable production, for example, if the production is performed too flashy, the player tends to lose interest in the subsequent production. However, in the present embodiment, in the premier production in the middle of the variable production, the production is performed using a relatively small number of production means, so that the player's interest can be continued. Further, by continuing the BGM during the first production in the middle of the variable production, it is possible to make the player recognize that the production is continuing and to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the subsequent production.

[Timer interrupt processing by the effect control unit 130]
Next, the details of the effect control based on various commands from the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 130. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 of the effect control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 57 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by an interrupt. In the following description, it is assumed that the effect control unit 130 performs the processes shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, but a part or all of these processes are performed by the effect control unit 130, the image / sound control unit 140, and the lamp control. It may be executed by any of the parts 150.

The effect control unit 130 (CPU 131) first executes a command reception process (step S1001). The command reception process in step S1001 is a process for controlling the effect based on various commands from the game control unit 100. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 receives a command from the game control unit 100, determines the content of the effect according to the received command, and applies the determined effect to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Generates a command to be executed and sets it in RAM 133. The details of the command reception process in step S1001 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 58.

Following step S1001, the effect control unit 130 performs a command transmission process for transmitting each command set in the RAM 133 to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step S1002). For example, a command for starting the variation effect set in the process of step S1001 and a command for ending the variation effect are transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the image / sound control unit 140 performs an effect such as image display and sound output, and the lamp control unit 150 operates the movable accessory 7, lights the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, and produces the effect button 26 and the effect lever 28. Etc. are controlled.

Following the process in step S1002, the effect control unit 130 executes the transfer process (step S1003). Specifically, when the effect control unit 130 receives a control command from the image / sound control unit 140, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the lamp control unit 150. For example, the control commands from the image / sound control unit 140 include a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, a control command for operating the effect lever 28, and a panel lamp. There are control commands and the like for causing the 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light. Further, when the effect control unit 130 receives a control command from the lamp control unit 150, the effect control unit 130 transfers the control command to the image / sound control unit 140. The control commands from the lamp control unit 150 include a control command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated, a control command indicating that the effect lever 28 has been operated, and the like. By transmitting and receiving control commands between the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 via the effect control unit 130, a movable combination is performed so as to synchronize with the image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The object 7 operates, or an image is displayed in response to an operation on the effect button 26 or the effect lever 28.

[Command reception processing by the effect control unit 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed by the effect control unit 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the command reception process in step S1001 of FIG. 57.

First, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the hold command transmitted from the game control unit 100 has been received (step S1301). When it is determined that the hold command has been received (step S1301: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the hold command process (step S1302). The details of the pending command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1302 is executed, or when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (step S1301: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received (step S1303). ).

When the variation start command is received (step S1303: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the variation start command process (step S1304). Specifically, in step S1304, the effect control unit 130 determines the content of the variation effect according to the variation of the special symbol based on the received variation start command, and causes the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to determine the content of the variation effect. Generate a command to execute the variation effect. The command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the command transmission process of step S1002, and the variation effect is executed. The details of the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (step S1303: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received (step). S1305).

When the fluctuation stop command is received (step S1305: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the fluctuation stop command processing (step S1306). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 transmits a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, for example, the decorative symbol 51 that is variablely displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) in the liquid crystal display device 5 is finally stopped, and the variable effect is completed.

When the process of step S1306 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S1305: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the opening command has been received (step S1307). ).

When the opening command is received (step S1307: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the opening process (step S1308). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines the opening effect based on the opening command transmitted when the jackpot is won, and causes the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect.

When the process of step S1308 is executed, or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (step S1307: NO), the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the ending command has been received (step S1309). ..

When the ending command is received (step S1309: YES), the effect control unit 130 executes the ending process (step S1310). In the ending process, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed.

When the process of step S1310 is executed, or when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (step S1309: NO), the effect control unit 130 ends the process shown in FIG. 58.

[Hold command processing by the effect control unit 130]
FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command process in step 1302 of FIG. 58. First, the effect control unit 130 updates the number of reserved special symbol determinations stored in the RAM 133 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S1320). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to the value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. If this is the case, the number of pending second special symbol determinations is updated to the value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the effect control unit 130 acquires the pre-determination information included in the received hold command (step S1321).

Next, the effect control unit 130 determines by lottery whether or not to perform the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination information (step S1322). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to change the hold display 52 to a display mode having a higher degree of expectation than usual, and a scenario of change as a pre-determination effect. For example, it is determined whether or not the hold display 52 related to the winning of the starting port this time is changed to a mode with high expectation at the time of winning, and whether or not it is changed in the subsequent fluctuation of the special symbol. In addition, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform a continuous effect over fluctuations of a plurality of special symbols as a pre-determination effect.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 determines the winning sound when displaying the hold display 52 related to the winning of the starting port this time (step S1323). For example, the effect control unit 130 determines different winning sounds according to the color of the hold display 52 determined in step S1322.

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets the hold increase command based on the processing results of steps S1322 and S1323 (step S1324). By transmitting this hold increase command to the image / sound control unit 140, the hold display 52 related to the winning of the starting port this time is displayed in the liquid crystal display device 5 in the display mode determined in step S1322, and at the same time. The winning sound determined in step S1323 is output.

[Variation start command processing by the effect control unit 130]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. 58.

The effect control unit 130 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (step S1340). In this fluctuation start command, the information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process (whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol, etc.), whether the information of this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol It includes information on the winning start port indicating whether or not it is related to the determination, information on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The effect control unit 130 can specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the fluctuation start command. That is, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern (variation time). In addition, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the effect control unit 130 determines an effect pattern indicating the content of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1341). Here, the general flow of the variable production is determined. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence and type of SP development effect, and SPSP based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. The presence / absence and type of the development effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-variation effect, the type of the decorative symbol constituting the reach symbol, the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. Further, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform the second operation promotion effect performed immediately before the hit notification effect (big hit notification effect or reach loss notification effect) based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. do. Further, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform the third operation promotion effect performed immediately before the development effect (SP development effect or SPSP development effect) based on the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to perform various advance notice effects and the like when the variable effect according to the effect pattern determined in the process of step S1341 is performed by performing a lottery using the effect random numbers. , The content of the advance notice production and the like is determined (step S1342). Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned advance notice effect (effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit), the type of advance notice effect, and the timing to execute the advance notice effect based on the effect pattern. In addition to determining, whether or not to execute the first operation promotion effect, the timing of executing the first operation promotion effect, and the like are determined. Further, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the premier effect, the type of the premier effect, the timing of executing the premier effect, and the like based on the effect pattern, and whether or not to execute the first operation promotion effect. Alternatively, the timing for executing the first operation promotion effect is determined. The effect control unit 130 has a higher probability of determining that the premier effect is executed as the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter.

Next, the effect control unit 130 sets in the RAM 133 a variation effect start command instructing execution of the variation effect according to the effect pattern determined in the processes of steps S1341 and S1342 (step S1343). This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the determined variation effect (the effect performed during the variation of the special symbol including the reach effect, the advance notice effect, etc.) is executed by the image / sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Following the process of step S1343, the effect control unit 130 subtracts "1" from the number of holds stored in the RAM 133 (step S1344).

In addition to the above-described processing, the effect control unit 130 determines the effect mode (stage) based on the received fluctuation start command. The effect control unit 130 determines whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied, and if the predetermined conditions are satisfied, whether or not to change the effect mode (stage) by performing a lottery using the effect random numbers. To determine. For example, the effect control unit 130 determines, as a predetermined condition, whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after shifting to the current stage is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, or a specific effect (for example, SPSP) in the immediately preceding variation effect. It is judged whether or not the reach effect) has been executed. When it is decided to change the stage, the variation effect is executed by using the background image, BGM, decorative pattern, etc. according to the decided stage.

[Structure of image / sound control unit 140]
Next, an example of the configuration of the image / sound control unit 140 will be described. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the image / sound control unit 140.

As shown in FIG. 61, the image / sound control unit 140 includes a CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, a VRAM 145, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 146, and a signal output unit 147. It includes an output unit 148 and an acoustic ROM 149.

The CPU 141 has image data stored in a CG ROM (not shown) for the VDP 144 based on various tables such as a program stored in the control ROM 144, a display list creation table, a command received from the effect control unit 130, and the like. An instruction is given to display the image based on the above on the liquid crystal display device 5. This instruction is mainly given by the output of the display list.

The display list consists of a group of commands for instructing drawing in frame units, such as the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, the display priority, the display magnification, the angle of rotation, and the transmittance. It includes various parameters of. The display list creation table is a table used to create this display list.

Further, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to output the sound based on the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 149 from the speaker 24. In the sound ROM 149, the sound data corresponding to each of the above-mentioned BGMs 1 to 5, the sound data corresponding to the reach establishment sound, the sound data corresponding to the sound of the character 65, the sound data corresponding to the sound of the premier character 60, and the first 1 Sound data corresponding to the operation guidance sound, 2nd operation guidance sound corresponding to the sound data, 3rd operation guidance sound corresponding to the sound data, SP development sound corresponding to the sound data, SPSP development sound corresponding to the sound data, Acoustic data corresponding to the jackpot notification sound, acoustic data corresponding to various other sound effects, and the like are stored. Each acoustic data is stored as one file. The acoustic DSP 146 performs sound reproduction processing (decoding) based on the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 149, and outputs the sound to the outside via the speaker 24. Further, the CPU 141 controls the volume when the sound is output.

The acoustic DSP 146 is connected to an acoustic ROM 149 that stores various acoustic data related to music such as BGM, voices such as characters, sound effects, etc., an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 146, and an amplifier. Has been done. The acoustic DSP 146 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the CPU 141 into the SDRAM from the acoustic ROM 149, executes data processing to generate an acoustic signal, and outputs the generated acoustic signal to the speaker 24 (via an amplifier). .. The amplifier adjusts the volume according to the output volume (described later) specified by the CPU 141, and outputs an acoustic signal to the speaker 24.

The control ROM 142 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores a control program of the CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables, and the like.

The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the CPU 141 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing or the like.

The CGROM stores the effect data necessary for executing the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol, the effect associated with the jackpot game, and the like. This CGROM is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and is composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), sprite data (one image data), and a plurality of image data. The movie data, etc., which consists of a collection of images, is compressed and stored. It should be noted that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM may be compressed. Further, as a compression method of movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. Further, the CG ROM for storing image data and the acoustic ROM 149 for storing acoustic data may be the same storage means.

The VRAM 145 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and has a display list storage area, an expansion storage area, a frame buffer, and the like. In this embodiment, drawing processing by double buffering is performed.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the CPU 141. The expanded storage area stores image data that has been decompressed after being read from the CGROM. The frame buffer is a frame buffer that is also used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5.

The VDP 144 decompresses the image data stored in the CGROM in a compressed state, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompressed storage area. Further, the VDP 144 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the expansion storage area based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. Further, the VDP 144 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the liquid crystal display device 5.

The signal output unit 147 outputs a predetermined signal to the CPU 141 at a predetermined time interval (for example, 1 second interval) for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). For example, the signal output unit 147 may output a predetermined signal at regular time intervals. The CPU 141 executes different processing when a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147 and when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. The relationship between the predetermined signal output by the signal output unit 147 and the effect controlled by the CPU 141 will be described later.

The input / output unit 148 receives a command from the effect control unit 130 and transmits a command to the effect control unit 130. The input / output unit 148 is connected to the CPU 141.

In the present embodiment, the case where the VDP 144 is responsible for drawing control and the acoustic DSP 146 is responsible for sound control related to sound reproduction will be described, but in other embodiments, the VDP is responsible for both drawing control and sound control. The configuration may be adopted. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide an acoustic DSP. Further, the signal output unit 147 may be incorporated in another part instead of an independent circuit. For example, the VDP 144 or the CPU 141 may also serve as the signal output unit 147.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image / sound control unit 140]
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the image / sound control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the image / sound control unit 140. The image / sound control unit 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 62 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. do.

First, the image / sound control unit 140 (CPU 141) determines whether or not a variable effect start command has been received from the effect control unit 130 (step S1401). Upon receiving the variation effect start command, the image / sound control unit 140 starts the variation effect according to the content of the variation effect included in the variation effect start command (step S1402). As a result, the liquid crystal display device 5 starts the variable effect. Further, the sound related to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 24. The variation effect start command includes information on what kind of image is displayed at what timing and what kind of sound is output from the start of variation of the special symbol.

When the process of step S1402 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S1401, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not the variation effect is being executed (step S1403). When the variation effect is being executed (step S1403: YES), the image / sound control unit 140 executes the variation effect process (step S1404). The details of the processing during the variable effect will be described later.

When the process of step S1404 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S1403, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not the variation effect end command has been received (step S1405). When the variation effect end command is received (step S1405: YES), the image / sound control unit 140 ends the variation effect (step S1406). Specifically, the image / sound control unit 140 stops the decorative symbol 51 displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The image / sound control unit 140 does not stop the output BGM1 even when the effect control unit 130 receives the variable effect end command.

In addition to the processing shown in FIG. 62, the image / sound control unit 140 performs processing related to the hold command, processing related to the opening effect, processing related to the jackpot game effect during the jackpot game, processing related to the ending effect, and the like. As a result, the hold display 52 is displayed, the opening effect is executed, the jackpot game effect is executed, and the ending effect is executed.

[Processing during fluctuation production by the image / sound control unit 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the process during the variation effect in step S1404 will be described. FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the processing during the variation effect in step 1404 of FIG. 62. In the following, processing when the variation effect (variation effect that develops from the N reach effect to the SPSP reach effect) shown in FIG. 44 is determined based on the variation pattern OP4-1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63, the image / sound control unit 140 performs drawing processing (step S1420). Specifically, the VDP 144 generates an image and stores it in the frame buffer. Then, the image stored in the frame buffer is output to the liquid crystal display device 5 and displayed. A moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 by performing the drawing process at regular time intervals. The image / sound control unit 140 generates an image according to the variation effect (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of the variation of the special symbol according to the number of frames or the elapsed time from the start of the variation effect. And output. That is, when the content of the variation effect is determined by the effect control unit 130 (that is, at the start of the variation), what kind of image is generated at what frame (seconds later) from the start of the variation effect, and the liquid crystal display device 5 It is stipulated whether to output to. Further, at the start of the fluctuation, what kind of image is generated and output according to the number of frames after the start of the fluctuation effect when the operation means (effect button 26 or effect lever 28) is operated. , It is set at the start of fluctuation. Then, the image / sound control unit 140 performs a predetermined image drawing process at a predetermined timing.

For example, the image / sound control unit 140 displays an image related to the first operation promotion effect at a time point t5 (for example, 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Further, the image / sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premier character 60 at the time point t1. Specifically, when the effect button 26 is operated during the operation valid period of the first operation promotion effect (for example, between 5 seconds and 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the operation information is the lamp control unit 150. Is input to the image / sound control unit 140 (via the effect control unit 130). The image / sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premier character 60 at t1, which is the timing at which the operation information is input. Alternatively, at t1 when the operation valid period of the first operation promotion effect has elapsed (for example, 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the image / sound control unit 140 displays the image of the premier character 60. Further, the image / sound control unit 140 displays an image (for example, see FIG. 49 (E)) showing the establishment of reach at the time point T1 (for example, 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Further, the image / sound control unit 140 displays an image (for example, see FIG. 49 (H)) showing the SPSP development effect at the time point T2 (for example, 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Further, the image / sound control unit 140 displays an image (for example, see FIG. 50 (K)) related to the second operation promotion effect at a time point t2 (for example, 70 seconds after the start of fluctuation).

Here, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image / sound control unit 140 generates and outputs an image (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, the image / sound control unit 140 does not generate the image (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of the fluctuation when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. In this case, the image / sound control unit 140 may generate and output another image different from the image (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of the fluctuation. For example, when it is determined at time t1 to output an image of the premier character 60 suggesting the determination of the jackpot, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image / sound control unit 140 may perform the image / acoustic control unit 140. The image of the premier character 60 is output at the time point t1. On the other hand, even when it is decided to output the image of the premier character 60 suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot at the time point t1, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image acoustic control The unit 140 does not output the image of the premier character 60 at the time point t1. In this case, the image / sound control unit 140 may output an image that does not suggest the possibility of a big hit (an image that cannot recognize the possibility of a big hit).

In this way, by performing different display control when the predetermined signal is input and when the predetermined signal is not input, it is possible to give diversity to the effect.

Following step S1420, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not it is the voice control timing (step S1421). Here, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start outputting the sound and whether or not it is the timing to control the volume of the sound being output.

If YES is determined in step S1421, the image / sound control unit 140 performs sound control processing (step S1422). Hereinafter, the details of the sound control process in step S1422 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the sound control process in step S1422 of FIG. 63.

As shown in FIG. 64, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to start outputting a new sound (step S1441). As described above, at the start of the fluctuation, what kind of sound is output at what frame (after a few seconds) from the start of the fluctuation effect, and after what frame from the start of the variation effect, the operation means (effect button 26 or effect). What kind of sound is output is determined according to the operation of the lever 28). Then, if YES is determined in step S1441, the image / acoustic control unit 140 starts the reproduction processing of the predetermined acoustic data (step S1442).

For example, if it is determined at the start of the fluctuation that the image of the premier character 60 is output at the time point t1 and the reproduction of the acoustic data A1 corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60 is started, YES in step S1441 at the time point t1. Is determined. Then, in step S1422, the image / sound control unit 140 starts the reproduction process (decoding) of the sound data A1 corresponding to the sound of the premier character 60. Specifically, the CPU 141 of the image / sound control unit 140 instructs the sound DSP 146 to reproduce the sound data A1. In response to the instruction, the acoustic DSP 146 reads the acoustic data A1 and starts reproducing the sound of the premier character 60. After that, the acoustic DSP 146 continues the reproduction of the acoustic data A1 until the reproduction time of the acoustic data A1 ends without the instruction of the CPU 141. For example, when the reproduction time of the acoustic data A1 is 3 seconds, the acoustic DSP 146 continues the reproduction of the acoustic data A1 until 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the reproduction of the acoustic data A1.

Further, for example, when it is determined by the effect control unit 130 to start the reproduction of the BGM 1 at the start of the fluctuation, YES is determined in step S1441 at the start of the fluctuation. In this case, in step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data B1 corresponding to the BGM1. After that, the acoustic DSP 146 continues the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 until the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 is completed without the instruction of the CPU 141. Further, the CPU 141 may instruct the acoustic DSP 146 to repeat the BGM 1 (that is, repeat the reproduction of the acoustic data B1) when instructing the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 corresponding to the BGM 1. In this case, when the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 corresponding to the BGM1 is completed, the acoustic DSP 146 starts the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 again from the beginning. Further, when the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 is completed, the CPU 141 may instruct to start the reproduction of the acoustic data B1 again from the beginning.

Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441, for example, at the timing (T1) when the reach is established. Then, in step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data A2 corresponding to the reach establishment sound. As a result, the acoustic DSP 146 starts the reproduction of the acoustic data A2, and the reach establishment sound is output from the speaker 24.

Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441 at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach was established. Then, in step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data B2 corresponding to the BGM 2.

Further, the CPU 141 determines YES in step S1441 at the timing (T3) when the SPSP development effect is completed and the SPSP reach effect is started. Then, in step S1442, the CPU 141 instructs the acoustic DSP 146 to reproduce the acoustic data B4 corresponding to the BGM 4.

In this way, when it is time to output the sound, the image / sound control unit 140 starts reproducing the sound data corresponding to the sound. When the sound is output in synchronization with the image display, the image display start timing and the sound output start timing are synchronized, and after the sound output is started, the acoustic data reproduction is completed by the acoustic DSP 146. Playback of acoustic data is continued until. That is, in the present embodiment, when the sound is output in synchronization with the display of the image, the start timing is synchronized, but the sound and the image are not synchronized for each frame. As another control method, the sound and the image may be synchronized for each frame.

When the process of step S1442 is executed, or when it is determined as NO in step S1441, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to adjust the volume of the sound (step S1443). If YES is determined in step S1443, the image / sound control unit 140 adjusts the volume (step S1444).

For example, when another sound (for example, the sound of the premier character 60) is output during the output of the BGM 1, and the volume of the BGM 1 is controlled to be lowered, the image / sound control unit 140 outputs the sound. At the timing, YES is determined in step S1443. In this case, the image / sound control unit 140 starts reproducing the sound data A corresponding to the voice of the premier character 60 in step S1442, and controls the volume of the BGM1 in step S1444.

Here, the volume will be described. The volume of the sound of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is determined as follows.
-Acoustic data itself As described above, the image acoustic control unit 140 (acoustic ROM 149) stores acoustic data corresponding to each sound. The loudness of the data (the sound) itself is determined by the magnitude of the amplitude of the waveform.
-Basic volume value The basic volume value is a volume value recommended when reproducing the above acoustic data, and is specified for each acoustic data. The basic volume value is set by the developer of the gaming machine and is not changed by, for example, a player after the gaming machine is shipped. Basically, each acoustic data is defined to have the same basic volume value for both the sound related to the effect and the sound related to the error sound. For example, when the volume value is set in the range of "0" to "10", "5" is set as the basic volume value.
-Channel volume value The channel volume value is a volume value specified for each channel (described later). The channel volume value is specified when the image / sound control unit 140 (CPU 141) raises or lowers the volume.
-Master volume value The master volume value is a volume value adjusted by the player. For example, when the left key of the effect key 27 is pressed by the player, the master volume value is set to a small value, and when the right key of the effect key 27 is pressed, the master volume value is set to a large value. Set.

Then, the basic volume value is converted into the channel volume value, and the output volume is determined by the following equation.
Output volume = (channel volume value) x master volume value

Here, the channel used for sound output control will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of virtual channels are provided for sound output control. For example, six channels (1ch to 6ch) are provided as error sound channels used to output an error sound. In addition, 24 channels (7ch to 30ch) are provided as production sound channels used for outputting production sounds (sounds related to production such as BGM, character voice, and sound effects). One sound (one acoustic data) is output using one channel, and two or more sounds are not output using the same channel at the same time. Further, the effect sound is not output using the error sound channel. When outputting a certain error sound, the image / sound control unit 140 outputs using an vacant channel among the error sound channels 1ch to 6ch. Further, when the image / sound control unit 140 outputs a certain effect sound, the image / sound control unit 140 outputs using a vacant channel among the effect sound channels 7ch to 30ch.

When the production sound is output using a certain channel, the channel volume value is specified for that channel. Basically, the same (or corresponding) channel volume value as the basic volume value set in the acoustic data is set. When the image / sound control unit 140 changes the volume of the sound in step S1444, the channel volume value related to the sound is changed. For example, when the image / sound control unit 140 lowers the volume of the BGM1 in response to the execution of the advance notice effect while the BGM1 is being output, the channel volume value related to the BGM1 is changed from, for example, "5" to "3". When changing or muting BGM1, the channel volume value related to BGM1 is changed from, for example, "5" to "0". Further, when the volume of the BGM 1 is reduced (or increased) with time, the image / sound control unit 140 decreases (or increases) the channel volume value related to the BGM 1 with the passage of time.

When all of the production sound channels 7ch to 30ch are in use (when 24 types of production sounds are being output at the same time), when the image / sound control unit 140 outputs another new production sound, it is being output. Any of the production sounds is canceled, and the channel used for the output of the canceled production sound is used for the output of the newly generated production sound. Specifically, priority is given to each production sound. The priority is given to the sound in advance by the developer of the gaming machine 1. The priority of the effect sound is set in the range of 1 to 5, for example. For example, the priority of BGM1 may be set to the lowest "1", and the priority of the production sound (sound of the predetermined character 65 or the premier character 60) related to the premier effect or the preview effect may be set to "3". .. In this case, for example, in the case where 24 kinds of production sounds including BGM1 are being output at the same time during the pre-reach production, when the sound of the predetermined character 65 is output according to the start of the advance notice production, it is more predetermined than BGM1. The voice of the character 65 is preferentially output. The priority of BGM may be set to a relatively high value.

In addition, when a new production sound is output when all the production sound channels are in use, if the priority of the new production sound is lower than the priority of all the production sounds currently being output, the new production sound is released. The directing sound does not have to be output.

When the process of step S1444 is executed, or when NO is determined in step S1443, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not to stop the BGM being output (step S1445). If YES is determined in step S1445, the image / sound control unit 140 stops the BGM being output (step S1446).

For example, the image / sound control unit 140 stops the reproduction of the BGM 1 at the timing when the reach is established (FIG. 49 (E)). Further, the image / sound control unit 140 stops the reproduction of the BGM2 at the timing (FIG. 49 (H)) at which the SPSP development effect is started. Further, the image / sound control unit 140 stops the reproduction of the BGM 4 at the timing (FIG. 50 (K)) immediately before the start of the second operation promotion effect.

Here, in the process of step S1442, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image / sound control unit 140 produces a sound (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation. Output. On the other hand, the image / sound control unit 140 does not output the sound (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of the fluctuation when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. In this case, the image / sound control unit 140 may output a sound different from the sound (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of the fluctuation. For example, when it is determined to output the sound of the premier character 60 at the time point t1, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, the image / sound control unit 140 causes the premier character 60 at the time point t1. Output the sound of. On the other hand, even when it is determined to output the sound of the premier character 60 at the time point t1, when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image / sound control unit 140 may perform the time point t1. Does not output the sound of the premier character 60 in. In this case, the image / sound control unit 140 may output a sound that does not suggest the possibility of a big hit. The image / sound control unit 140 may output the sound determined at the start of the fluctuation (determined by the effect control unit 130) even when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. For example, when it is determined to output the sound of the premier character 60 at the time point t1, the image / sound control unit 140 may perform the premier character 60 at the time point t1 even when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. You may output the sound of.

Further, for example, when it is determined at the start of fluctuation that the sound / audio control unit 140 outputs the sound of the predetermined character 65 at the time point t1 during the output of the BGM 1, the predetermined value from the signal output unit 147 at the time point t1. While the BGM1 is continuously output when the signal of is input, the BGM1 is not continuously output when the predetermined signal is not input. That is, even if it is determined in advance that the BGM1 is continuously output at the time point t1, the BGM1 is not continuously output when the predetermined signal is not input at the time point t1. The image / sound control unit 140 may continuously output the BGM 1 even when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input. Further, when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is not input, the image / sound control unit 140 continuously outputs the BGM 1, while the sound (for example, a character) related to another advance notice effect determined at the start of the fluctuation. It is not necessary to output the audio).

Further, in the process of step S1444, the image / sound control unit 140 adjusts the volume when the predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input, while the image / sound control unit 140 adjusts the volume when the predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147. Do not adjust the volume.

Further, when it is determined at the start of fluctuation that the BGM being output is stopped at a predetermined timing, the image / sound control unit 140 is input even when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input. Even when it is not, the BGM is stopped at the predetermined timing.

In this way, by performing different sound control when the predetermined signal is input and when the predetermined signal is not input, it is possible to give diversity to the production. This is the end of the description of the process of FIG. 64.

Note that the sound determined at the start of fluctuation may be output regardless of whether or not a predetermined signal is input from the signal output unit 147.

Returning to FIG. 63, whether or not the image / sound control unit 140 is the control timing of the effect means (movable accessory 7, panel lamp 25, frame lamp 37, effect button 26, effect lever 28, etc.) controlled by the lamp control unit 150. (Step S1423). As described above, as the content of the fluctuation effect determined at the start of the variation, at what timing the movable accessory 7 is operated, the effect button 26 is controlled (operation, light emission, vibration, etc.), and the effect lever 28 is controlled. (Operation, light emission, vibration, etc.), light emission of the panel lamp 25, or light emission of the frame lamp 37 is determined. For example, the image / sound control unit 140 determines whether or not the control timing is the movable accessory 7 or the like controlled by the lamp control unit 150, based on the number of frames or the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation.

If YES is determined in step S1423, the image / sound control unit 140 transmits a control command to the effect control unit 130 (step S1424). The control commands include a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the effect button 26, a control command for operating the effect lever 28, and a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 to emit light. There are control commands and the like for causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light. When the effect control unit 130 receives these control commands from the image / sound control unit 140, the effect control unit 130 transfers these control commands to the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the movable accessory 7 operates, the effect button 26 operates, the effect lever 28 operates, the board lamp 25 emits light, and the frame lamp 37 emits light.

For example, the image / sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 (via the effect control unit 130) to the lamp control unit 150 at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7. Further, the image / sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light to the lamp control unit 150 at the timing of causing the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light.

Here, in the process of step S1424, the image / sound control unit 140 is a control command (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation when a predetermined signal from the signal output unit 147 is input. Is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. For example, at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7, when a predetermined signal is input, a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. On the other hand, when a predetermined signal is not input from the signal output unit 147, the image / sound control unit 140 may or may not output the control command defined at the start of the fluctuation. For example, when a predetermined signal is not input at the timing of operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 may or may not be transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. May be good. When the image / sound control unit 140 transmits a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 even when a predetermined signal is not input, the movable accessory 7 operates. That is, in this case, the movable accessory 7 operates in a predetermined mode at the start of fluctuation regardless of whether or not a predetermined signal is input. If the image / sound control unit 140 does not send a control command for operating the movable accessory 7 to the lamp control unit 150 when a predetermined signal is not input, the movable accessory 7 is determined at the start of fluctuation. Does not work in any manner. In this case, the movable accessory 7 may operate in another mode.

The same applies to the light emission of the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37. That is, when a predetermined signal is input, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in a mode (determined by the effect control unit 130) determined at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, when a predetermined signal of the image / sound control unit 140 is not input, a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light may or may not be transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. .. When the predetermined signal is not input and the control command for causing the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 to emit light is not transmitted to the lamp control unit 150, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 do not emit light. In this case, the panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 may emit light in another manner. When a control command for causing the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 to emit light is transmitted to the lamp control unit 150 even when a predetermined signal is not input, the panel lamp 25 or the frame lamp 37 responds to the control command. It emits light.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the BGM is output during the variable effect, and the first effect (preliminary effect or premier effect) of continuing the output BGM and the first effect of stopping the output BGM are stopped. Two productions (development production and jackpot notification production) are performed. Assuming that the effect proceeds according to the flow of BGM, when the first effect is performed, the BGM is continuously output, so that the first effect can be executed without breaking the flow of BGM. Further, for example, since the BGM is stopped when the jackpot notification effect indicating the confirmation of the jackpot is executed, the player's attention can be directed to the jackpot notification effect.

[Modification example]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may have the following embodiments.

For example, in the above embodiment, BGM1, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, and BGM5 are stored in the acoustic ROM 149 as separate acoustic data (acoustic files). Then, for example, when switching from BGM2 to BGM3, the reproduction of BGM2 is stopped (the reproduction of the acoustic data corresponding to BGM2 is finished), and the reproduction of the acoustic data corresponding to BGM3 is started. Further, for example, when the jackpot notification effect is performed from the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the reproduction of the BGM4 is stopped, the jackpot notification effect is performed, and the reproduction of the BGM5 is started. In another embodiment, the BGMs 1 to 5 are stored in the acoustic ROM 149 as one acoustic data (acoustic file), and the reproduction of the acoustic data is paused or the reproduction position is changed to perform each production. BGM may be output. For example, when the jackpot notification effect is performed from the final stage of the SPSP reach effect, the BGM4 may be paused by suspending the reproduction of the acoustic data constituting the BGM4 and the BGM5. Then, the jackpot notification sound may be output according to the execution of the jackpot notification effect, and then the BGM5 portion may be output by restarting the reproduction of the acoustic data from the paused position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the above-mentioned image-based effect and sound control are performed in the variable effect during the change of the special symbol, but the same control as described above is performed not only in the variable effect but also in the effect during the jackpot game. You may. Further, the same control may be performed regardless of whether the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state advantageous to the player, or the time-saving gaming state.

Further, the various values exemplified in the above embodiment (for example, fluctuation time, probability, etc.) are merely examples, and values different from those described above may be used.

Further, it goes without saying that the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for the determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

[Modification example of decorative design]
In addition, it may have a function of suggesting the degree of expectation for a jackpot for an element related to the color of a decorative pattern (specifically, a number). For example, an image representing a number of a decorative pattern may be composed of different colors according to the number. For example, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 10R probability variation, even symbols and odd symbols are selected as reach symbols (decorative symbols used for reach effect. Two types of decorative symbols that stop left and right during reach effect). On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is 4R normal, the odd number symbol may not be selected. In this case, it is possible to have a function of suggesting the degree of expectation for the element related to the color of the decorative pattern to shift to the probabilistic gaming state. That is, for example, in the case where the SPSP reach effect is performed, when an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbols) of a predetermined color is displayed as a reach symbol, an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbols) other than the predetermined color is displayed as a reach symbol. It can be said that the degree of expectation to shift to the probabilistic gaming state is higher than when it is played. In addition, when the jackpot expectation differs depending on the number of the reach symbol, the jackpot expectation can be suggested by the color of the decorative symbol.

Further, the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols and the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols may have different colors, the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols may have a plurality of colors, or the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols may have a plurality of colors. good. For example, among the odd-numbered symbols, when the color of the number "7" constituting the 7 symbols is red and the color of the numbers constituting the odd-numbered symbols other than the 7 symbols is green, the numbers constituting the even-numbered symbols The color may be blue (ie, a color other than red and green).

It should be noted that a plurality of types of colors may be associated with one number constituting each decorative pattern. For example, white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are prepared in advance as the colors of the numbers that make up each decorative pattern, and in this order, the jackpot expectation and the expectation for shifting to the probabilistic gaming state. May be set in advance so as to be high. For example, the expectation is higher when the reach symbol is a white odd symbol than when the reach symbol is a white even symbol, and further, the expectation is higher when the reach symbol is a red odd symbol. (The jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the color of the decorative pattern.

Further, a plurality of types of characters may be prepared in advance as additional displays for one number constituting each decorative pattern. For example, the character that is the additional display is different for each number that constitutes the decorative pattern, and a plurality of characters may be associated with each number as the additional display. Specifically, the characters A to C, which are additional displays of the seven symbols, may not be the additional display of decorative symbols indicating other numbers. For example, the jackpot expectation may be set in the order of characters A to C, and the expectation for shifting to the probabilistic gaming state may be set in advance. For example, the expectation is higher when the reach is established by the decorative symbol of the first aspect to which the character A is added than when the reach is established by the decorative symbol of the first aspect to which the character B is added. The degree of expectation is higher when the reach is established by the decorative symbol of the first aspect to which the character C is added (the jackpot may be confirmed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the elements related to the additional display of the decorative pattern. As additional displays, a plurality of types of characters corresponding to any of the symbols 1 to 9 may be prepared in advance. For example, characters A to C are prepared as additional displays corresponding to all of the symbols 1 to 9. You may.

A modified example of the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the second aspect will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the additional display displayed by being added to the numbers constituting the decorative pattern. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modified example of the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the second aspect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol of the first aspect is composed of a number and a character which is an additional display corresponding to the number, and the decorative symbol of the second aspect is composed of a number without an additional display. It is composed. In the modified example described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, regardless of the mode of the decorative symbol, any one of the additional images A to C, which is an effect image different from the character, is the decorative symbol. Is always added to the numbers that make up. The additional images A to C are additional displays superimposed on the back side of the numbers constituting the decorative symbols in both the first and second decorative symbols.

Specifically, in the decorative pattern of the first aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the character, which is another additional display even on the back side of the number (FIG. 66 (A)). Further, in the decorative pattern of the second aspect, any one of the additional images A to C is superimposed and displayed on the back side of the number (see FIG. 66 (B)).

The additional images A to C move or do not move in the same manner as the character that is the additional display. Specifically, the additional images A to C are, for example, when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is temporarily stopped and when the decorative symbol of the first aspect is changed to the decorative symbol of the second aspect (and). In the opposite case), it swings in synchronization with the fine movement of the numbers that make up the decorative pattern. Further, when scrolling, the additional images A to C do not swing regardless of the speed. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the numbers constituting the decorative symbol become a still image, and the additional images A to C do not move at all and become a still image like the character which is the additional display. In another embodiment, while the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are still images during the stop display of the special symbol, the additional images A to C may move.

The additional image A is an ocher image, and is an additional display corresponding to odd-numbered symbols other than the seven symbols (see FIG. 65 (A)). The additional image B is a silver image having the same pattern as the additional image A, and is an additional display corresponding to even-numbered symbols (see FIG. 65 (B)). Further, the additional display C is a golden image having a pattern different from that of the additional images A and B, and is an additional display corresponding to the seven symbols.

Since the type of the additional image is uniquely determined for one decorative pattern, it is possible to determine whether the number constituting the decorative pattern is an odd number, an even number, or "7" depending on the type of the additional image. As a result, for example, the element related to the color of the decorative symbol is blue compared to the case where the element related to the color of the decorative symbol (specifically, the number) is green and the additional image A (that is, an odd number symbol other than the 7 symbols). It can be suggested that in the case of the additional image B (that is, even-numbered symbols), the jackpot expectation and the expectation for shifting to the probabilistic gaming state are higher. Further, for example, when the element related to the color of the decorative symbol is green and the additional image C (that is, 7 symbols), the jackpot expectation and the expectation of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state are higher than in the case of other combinations. It can be suggested that the degree is high.

Since the additional indications A to C are attached to the decorative symbol of the first aspect and the decorative symbol of the second aspect, they are always displayed when the decorative symbol is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol. In the normal mode (during the normal gaming state) and the probabilistic mode (during the probabilistic gaming state), the numbers constituting the decorative symbol are the same, and the additional images A to C can be displayed. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity to these different production modes.

The additional image A and the additional image B may be images of different colors, or may be an image in which a part is the same and the other part is different.

Further, a plurality of additional images may be associated with one number constituting the decorative pattern. For example, when the additional image A or the additional image C is added to one number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to add the additional image C, and the lower the reliability, the easier it is to add the additional image A. good. The additional image C may be added when it is a big hit, but may not be added when it is a loss.

When such a decorative symbol is used, for example, before the reach is established, BGM1 is output while the three decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed, and when the decorative symbols stop (or stop) on the left and right, a character that is an additional display is displayed. It moves, and when this movement stops, a reach establishment sound may be output and BGM1 may stop. During the N reach effect after the reach is established, BGM2 is output, the decorative symbols stop on the left and right, and at this time, the character that is the additional display does not move. Next, when developing from the N reach effect to the SP reach effect, the character that is an additional display moves, the SP development sound is output in synchronization with this movement, and the BGM2 is stopped. That is, before and after the BGM is switched, the characters that are additional displays of the decorative symbols may move in synchronization.

[Structure of a gaming machine according to the present invention and its action and effect]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. It should be noted that the parentheses indicate the correspondence with the embodiment and are merely an example.

(Structure 1)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 1 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output unit for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. Is possible, the second effect can be executed based on the result of the special game determination, and the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed. It is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the first effect, and during the second effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect is stopped.

According to this configuration 1, when the first effect (for example, advance notice effect, premier effect, etc.) is executed, the sound (for example, BGM1) is continuously output, while the second effect (for example, jackpot notification effect, development effect) is continued. Etc.) is executed, the sound (for example, BGM4 etc.) is stopped. As a result, for example, since the BGM is continuously output regardless of whether the first effect is executed or not, the effect can be advanced according to the flow of music, and the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, when the second effect is executed, the BGM that has been flowing until just before is stopped, so that the player can concentrate on the second effect and raise the expectation of the player, and the second effect can be emphasized.

In the above configuration 1, the first effect and the second effect may be executed in one change of the symbol. Further, in the configuration 1, the second effect may be an effect performed after the first effect. Further, in the configuration 1, the second effect may be an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the first effect. Further, during the first effect, the sound reproduction may be continued internally, but the sound output may be suppressed (the volume may be lowered or the volume may be set to "0").

(Structure 2)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 2 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect are provided, and the effect control means is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, control the output of the sound output from the output means, and execute the special game in the special game determination. When it is determined, there is a time when the first effect pattern including the finalized effect of the first number of times is executed and a time when the second effect pattern including the finalized effect of the second number of times different from the first number of times is executed. When the first effect pattern is executed, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the final effect is stopped during the first final effect, and the second effect pattern is executed. During the final effect prior to the second final effect, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the final effect can be continued, and during the second final effect, the sound is reproduced. The output of the sound that was output before the execution of the final effect is stopped.

According to this configuration 2, even when the first number of times (for example, only the last jackpot notification effect) is confirmed, the second number of times (for example, the premier effect during the pre-reach effect or the reach effect) and the final jackpot notification are performed. Even when performing a final production (twice the production), the BGM is continuously output before the final notification production, so the production can proceed according to the flow of music, and the continuity of the production can be maintained. .. Further, since the BGM is stopped in any case in the final final effect, the player can concentrate on the final final effect and emphasize the final final effect.

In the above configuration 2, the execution rate of the second effect pattern may be lower than the execution rate of the first effect pattern. For example, the second effect pattern may be executed at a higher rate or a lower rate than the first effect pattern. Further, the first effect pattern may be more easily executed when the fluctuation time of the symbol is long than when the fluctuation time is short. Further, the second effect pattern may be more easily executed when the fluctuation time of the symbol is long than when the fluctuation time is short. Further, the second number of times may be larger than the first number of times. Further, the first number of times may be one or more times, and the second number of times may be two or more times. Further, the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern may be selected according to the fluctuation time of the symbol. For example, when the fluctuation time of the symbol is the first hour, the first effect pattern is selected (at a rate of 100%), and the fluctuation time of the symbol is longer (or shorter) than the first hour in the second hour. In that case, the second effect pattern may be selected (at a rate of 100%).

(Structure 3)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 3 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect are provided, and the effect control means is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operable operation means, and a sound output from the output means. When it is determined in the special game determination that the special game is to be executed, when the first effect pattern including the final effect of the first number of times is executed, and the first number of times There are times when a second effect pattern including the finalized effect of a different second number of times is executed, and when the first effected pattern is executed, the operation promotion effect is performed before the finalized effect of the first number of times is executed. When the sound output that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped during the operation promotion effect and the second effect pattern is executed, the sound is executed before the second final effect. During the finalization effect of, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the finalization effect can be continued, and the operation promotion effect is executed before the second finalization effect is executed to promote the operation. During the production, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped.

According to this configuration 3, in addition to the configuration 2, there are the following effects. That is, in the case of any of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern, the operation promotion effect for prompting the operation to the operation means is performed immediately before the final final effect (for example, the jackpot notification effect). The operation can be guided to the player, and the player can be prepared for the operation. In addition, since the final effect is performed according to the operation, the player can actively operate the operation means. Further, since the BGM is continuously played during the execution of the final effect before the final final effect (for example, the premier effect during the pre-reach effect or the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. Immediately before the final finalization effect, the operation promotion effect is performed, and during the operation promotion effect, the BGM is stopped. Can make the player excited. That is, since the operation of the operating means is promoted from the noisy state to the quiet state suddenly, it is possible to concentrate on the operation and amplify the feeling of excitement for the operation.

In the configuration 3, for example, the second effect pattern may or may not be executed more probable than the first effect pattern. Further, the first effect pattern may be more easily executed when the fluctuation time of the symbol is long than when the fluctuation time is short. Further, the second effect pattern may be more easily executed when the fluctuation time of the symbol is long than when the fluctuation time is short. Further, the second number of times may be larger than the first number of times. Further, the first number of times may be one or more times, and the second number of times may be two or more times.

(Structure 4)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the fourth configuration has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect are provided, and the effect control means is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the operable operation means, and a sound output from the output means. When it is determined in the special game determination that the special game is to be executed, when the first effect pattern including the final effect of the first number of times is executed, and the first number of times May execute a second effect pattern including the final effect of a different second number of times, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the operation promotion effect is performed before the final effect of the first number of times is executed. When the sound output that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped during the operation promotion effect and the second effect pattern is executed, the sound is executed before the second final effect. During the finalization effect of, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the finalization effect can be continued, and the operation promotion effect is executed before the second finalization effect is executed to promote the operation. During the production, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped, and the execution probability of the second effect pattern is lower than the execution probability of the first effect pattern.

According to the configuration 4, in addition to the configuration similar to the configuration 3, the execution probability of the second effect pattern is lower than the execution probability of the first effect pattern. As a result, the same effect as that of the configuration 3 can be obtained, and it is possible to make it difficult to execute the final effect during the output of the BGM, so that the player's attention can be directed to the BGM.

In the configuration 4, the first operation promotion effect is performed before the final effect prior to the second final effect is executed, and during the first operation promotion effect, before the execution of the first operation promotion effect. The reproduction process of the sound output from may be continued. The operation promotion effect (second operation promotion effect) is performed before the first or second finalization effect is executed. In such a configuration, since the operation promotion effect is performed a plurality of times, the expectation can be raised stepwise each time the operation is performed. In addition, the start timing of the first final effect may shift depending on the timing of the operation during the first operation promotion effect, but since the BGM does not stop during the first operation promotion effect, the subsequent production is performed along the flow of music. It can be advanced and the continuity of the production can be maintained. For example, assuming that the SPSP reach effect is started at a certain timing in the BGM (for example, at the start time of the chorus part), even if the operation timings during the first operation promotion effect are different, the SPSP reach effect is always performed at the same timing. You can start. In addition, the number of times the operation promotion effect is executed when it is determined to be a big hit is diversified, the range of the effect is widened, and it is possible to make the gaming machine interesting and less likely to get bored.

In a configuration in which the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be executed, the first operation guidance sound is output when the first operation promotion effect is performed, and when the second operation promotion effect is performed. May output a second operation guidance sound different from the first operation guidance sound. In this case, the operation guidance sound can recognize the final effect executed in response to the operation. The second operation guidance sound may be a sound longer than the first operation guidance sound. When the BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it does not interfere with the music. On the other hand, when the BGM is stopped, a relatively long second operation guidance sound can be output, which can enhance the interest. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different or the same effect. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that encourage operations for different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that promote operations on the same operation means, and may be different effects. Further, when the fluctuation time of the symbol is long, the effect based on the second effect pattern may be more easily executed than when the fluctuation time is short. Further, the second number of times may be larger than the first number of times. Further, the first number of times may be one or more times, and the second number of times may be two or more times.

(Structure 5)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 5 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect are provided, and the effect control means is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be performed. It is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means, and when it is determined in the special game determination that the special game is to be executed, when the first effect pattern including the final effect is executed and the advance notice. There are times when the effect and the second effect pattern including the final effect are executed, and when the first effect pattern is executed, during the final effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the final effect is output. When the second effect pattern is stopped and the second effect pattern is executed, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the advance notice effect can be continued during the advance notice effect, and during the final effect, the final effect is performed. Stops the output of the sound that was output before execution.

According to this configuration 5, since the sound (BGM) continues during the advance notice effect, the BGM can be stopped at the same timing at the final final effect regardless of whether the advance notice effect is performed or not. .. By continuing the BGM during the advance notice production, the continuity of the production can be maintained, while when the final production is executed, the BGM can be stopped to enhance the feeling of excitement and emphasize the final production.

(Structure 6)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 6 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect are provided, and the effect control means is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game will be performed. It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that encourages an operation on an operation means that can be operated by a person, it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means, and it is determined in the special game determination that a special game is to be executed. When this is done, there are times when the first effect pattern including the final effect is executed and when the second effect pattern including the advance notice effect and the final effect is executed. When the first effect pattern is executed, When the operation promotion effect is executed before the final effect is executed, the output of the sound output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped during the operation promotion effect, and the second effect pattern is executed. During the advance notice effect, the sound reproduction process that was output before the advance notice effect was executed can be continued, the operation promotion effect is executed before the finalized effect is executed, and the operation promotion effect is executed during the operation promotion effect. The output of the sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped.

According to this configuration 6, in addition to the same effect as that of the configuration 5, since the operation promotion effect is performed before the final effect is executed, the player can be guided to the operation and the player is prepared for the operation. be able to. In addition, since the final effect is performed according to the operation, the player can actively operate the operation means. Further, since the BGM is continuously played during the execution of the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect during the pre-reach effect or the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. In addition, the operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the final effect, and the BGM is stopped during the operation promotion effect. Can excite people.

In the above configuration 6, the first operation promotion effect is performed before the advance notice effect is executed, and during the first operation promotion effect, the sound reproduction process that has been output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect is performed. You may continue. The operation promotion effect (second operation promotion effect) is performed before the final operation is executed. In such a configuration, since the advance notice effect is performed in the first operation and the final effect is performed in the second operation, the expectation can be raised step by step with each operation. Further, in this configuration, the BGM continues in the first operation promotion effect before the notice effect having a relatively low expectation (for example, 10% to 50%), while the BGM continues before the final effect with a high expectation (100%). BGM stops in the second operation promotion effect. As a result, the continuity of the production can be emphasized before the production with low expectation (preliminary production) is executed, and the expectation can be further raised before the production with high expectation (final production) is executed. It is possible to strike a balance between smoothing the flow of production and increasing gambling.

In a configuration in which the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be executed, the first operation guidance sound is output when the first operation promotion effect is performed, and when the second operation promotion effect is performed. May output a second operation guidance sound different from the first operation guidance sound. In this case, the second operation guidance sound may be a sound longer than the first operation guidance sound. When the BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it does not interfere with the music. On the other hand, when the BGM is stopped, a relatively long second operation guidance sound can be output, which can enhance the interest. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different or the same effect. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that encourage operations for different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that promote operations on the same operation means, and may be different effects. Further, when the fluctuation time of the symbol is long, it may be easier (or more difficult) to execute the effect based on the second effect pattern than when the variation time is short.

(Structure 7)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 7 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output unit for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect. It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of being performed, and based on the result of the special game determination, the effect is different from the notice effect and suggests that the special game is likely to be performed. The effect can be executed, the specific suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is performed can be executed before the specific effect, and the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed. Yes, during the advance notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the advance notice effect, and during the specific suggestion effect, the sound that was output before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. Stop the output.

According to this configuration, since the sound (BGM) continues during the advance notice effect, the same applies to the specific suggestion effect (for example, SP development effect, SPSP development effect) regardless of whether the advance notice effect is performed or not. BGM can be stopped at the timing. In the advance notice production, the continuity of the production can be maintained by continuing the BGM, while in the specific suggestion production, by stopping the BGM, it is possible to raise the expectation that the specific production will develop into a highly expected specific production. In addition, expectations can be raised step by step from the notice effect to the specific suggestion effect, and by stopping the BGM, the expectation can be further increased.

In the above configuration 7, the effect control means may be able to execute the advance notice effect and the specific effect in one change of the symbol, and execute the advance notice effect and the specific effect in one change of the symbol. In this case, during the advance notice effect, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the advance notice effect can be continued, and during the specific suggestion effect, the sound was output before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. The sound output may be stopped. Further, in the above configuration 7, the specific suggestion effect may be an effect that suggests the development to the specific effect and the player can recognize the type of the specific effect. Further, the specific suggestion effect may be a blackout effect or a switching effect indicating switching to a specific effect (an effect indicating switching of a background image or a decorative pattern).

(Structure 8)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 8 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output unit for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect. It is possible to execute a notice effect that suggests the possibility of being performed, and based on the result of the special game determination, the effect is different from the notice effect and suggests that the special game is likely to be performed. The effect can be executed, the specific suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is performed can be executed before the specific effect, and the operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the operable operating means is executed. It is possible, and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means, and when the first effect pattern including the specific effect is executed based on the result of the special game determination, and the advance notice. There are times when the effect and the second effect pattern including the specific effect are executed, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the operation promotion effect is executed before the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the operation promotion effect is being performed. Stops the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion work effect, and when the second effect pattern is executed, during the advance notice effect, the sound that was output before the execution of the advance notice effect. Can be continued, the operation promotion effect is executed before the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the sound output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped during the operation promotion effect. ..

According to the configuration 8, in addition to the same effect as that of the configuration 7, the operation promotion effect is performed before the specific suggestion effect is executed, so that the player can be guided to the operation and the player is prepared for the operation. Can be made to. In addition, since the specific suggestion effect is performed according to the operation, the player can actively operate the operation means. Further, since the BGM is continuously played during the execution of the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect during the pre-reach effect or the reach effect), the continuity of the effect can be maintained. In addition, the operation promotion effect is performed immediately before the specific suggestion effect, and the BGM is stopped during the operation promotion effect. Can make the player excited.

In the above configuration 8, the first operation promotion effect is performed before the advance notice effect is executed, and during the first operation promotion effect, the sound reproduction process that has been output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect is performed. You may continue. Before executing the specific suggestion effect, the operation promotion effect (second operation promotion effect) is performed. In such a configuration, since the advance notice effect is performed in the first operation and the specific suggestion effect is performed in the second operation, the expectation can be raised step by step with each operation. Further, in this configuration, the BGM continues in the first operation promotion effect before the notice effect having a relatively low expectation, while the BGM stops in the second operation promotion effect before the specific effect having a high expectation. As a result, the continuity of the production can be emphasized before the production with low expectation (preliminary production) is executed, and the expectation can be further raised before the production with high expectation (specific production) is executed. It is possible to strike a balance between smoothing the flow of production and increasing gambling.

In a configuration in which the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be executed, the first operation guidance sound is output when the first operation promotion effect is performed, and when the second operation promotion effect is performed. May output a second operation guidance sound different from the first operation guidance sound. In this case, the second operation guidance sound may be a sound longer than the first operation guidance sound. When the BGM continues, a relatively short first operation guidance sound is output, so that it does not interfere with the music. On the other hand, when the BGM is stopped, a relatively long second operation guidance sound can be output, which can enhance the interest. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different or the same effect. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that encourage operations for different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that promote operations on the same operation means, and may be different effects. Further, when the fluctuation time of the symbol is long, it may be easier (or more difficult) to execute the effect based on the second effect pattern than when the variation time is short.

(Structure 9)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 9 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output unit for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. (For example, during the pre-reach effect, the advance notice effect during the reach effect, etc.) can be executed, and the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect based on the result of the special game determination. The effect (for example, the final jackpot notification effect, etc.) can be executed, and before the first effect is executed, the first operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operable operating means can be executed. Before executing the second effect, it is possible to execute the second operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operable operation means, and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means. During the first operation promotion effect, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect can be continued, and during the second operation promotion effect, the second operation promotion effect The output of the sound that was output before the execution is stopped, the first effect sound can be output in the first operation promotion effect, and the second effect sound can be output in the second operation promotion effect.

According to this configuration 9, the second operation promotion sound is output in the second operation promotion effect immediately before the second effect, and the first effect sound is output in the first operation promotion effect immediately before the first effect. For example, when the second production has a higher expectation than the first production, the player's expectation can be raised by the second production sound. In addition, since the BGM is stopped during the second operation promotion effect, the second effect sound (for example, a sound louder than the first effect sound, a sound longer than the first effect sound, and a sound longer than the first effect sound) before becoming quiet. By outputting a flashy sound), expectations can be further raised, and a sharp production can be achieved, which can improve the interest.

In the configuration 9, the effect control means can execute the first effect and the second effect in one change of the symbol, and the first effect and the first effect in one change of the symbol. When the two effects can be executed, during the first operation promotion effect, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect can be continued, and during the second operation promotion effect, the sound reproduction process can be continued. , The output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second operation promotion effect may be stopped. Further, the first effect sound may be output immediately before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, may be output immediately after the execution of the first operation promotion effect, or may be output during the execution of the first operation promotion effect. May be done. Further, the second effect sound may be output immediately before the execution of the second operation promotion effect, may be output immediately after the execution of the second operation promotion effect, or may be output during the execution of the second operation promotion effect. May be done. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be different or the same effect. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect may be effects that encourage operations for different operation means. Further, the second operation promotion effect and the first operation promotion effect are effects that promote operations on the same operation means, and may be different effects. Further, during the variable display of the symbol, there are a case where the first effect pattern including the second effect is executed without including the first effect and a case where the second effect pattern including the first effect and the second effect is executed. On the premise of this, the effect based on the second effect pattern may be more easily (or more difficult) to be executed when the variation time of the symbol is longer than when the variation time is short. Further, the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern is selected according to the fluctuation time of the symbol, and when the variation time of the symbol is long, the effect based on the second effect pattern is selected (at a rate of 100%). If the variation time of the symbol is short, an effect based on the first effect pattern may be selected (at a rate of 100%).

(Structure 10)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 10 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect are provided, and the effect control means is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, and it is possible to execute a first notice effect suggesting the possibility that the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination. Based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a second advance notice effect different from the first advance notice effect, and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means. During the 1st notice effect, the sound reproduction process that was output before the execution of the 1st notice effect can be continued, and during the finalization effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the finalization effect is output. When stopped, the first notice effect may be executed together with the second notice effect, and the finalized effect is not executed together with the second notice effect.

According to this configuration 10, since the first notice effect may be executed in combination with the second notice effect and may not be executed in combination with the second notice effect, the notice effect can have variations. On the other hand, the final effect can be concentrated on the final effect, which is not executed in combination with the second notice effect. By stopping the BGM in the final production, it is possible to concentrate more on the final production. The effect control means may be able to execute the first notice effect and the final effect in one change of the symbol, and may perform the first notice effect and the final effect in one change of the symbol. When executing, during the first notice effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the first notice effect, and during the final effect, it is output before the execution of the final effect. You may stop the output of the sound that was being played.

(Structure 11)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 11 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output means for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect are provided, and the effect control means is determined to execute a special game in the special game determination. In this case, it is possible to execute a definite effect suggesting that the special game is executed, and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means. It is possible to execute the first final effect performed by using the effect means and the second final effect performed by using a second predetermined number of effect means different from the first predetermined number, and the first final effect is in progress. Can continue the reproduction processing of the sound that was output before the execution of the first final effect, and during the second final effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second final effect is output. Stop.

According to this configuration 11, in the first final effect, the effect is performed using the first predetermined number of effect means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 5 and the frame lamp 37), and in the second final effect, the effect is different from the first predetermined number. A second predetermined number of effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 5, a panel lamp 25, a frame lamp 37, and a movable accessory 7) can be used for the effect. For example, the second predetermined number may be larger than the first predetermined number. In the first final production, relatively few production means are used to produce a less flashy effect, and the BGM does not stop. For those who are convinced of the jackpot, they can raise their expectations at once. In the second final production, the BGM is stopped and a flashy production is performed using a relatively large number of production means, so that expectations and satisfaction can be raised for all players. In addition, by stopping BGM, it is possible to draw attention to the flashy production, and it is possible to improve the interest. The effect control means can execute the first final effect and the second final effect in one change of the symbol, and the first final effect and the second final effect in one change of the symbol. When executing the effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound output before the execution of the first final effect during the first final effect, and during the second final effect, the second final effect can be continued. The output of the sound that was output before the execution of the effect may be stopped.

In the second final effect, any number of effect means may be used as long as the effect is more decorative than the first final effect. Here, a highly decorative production is a production that looks flashy to the player. For example, in the second final effect, the movable accessory 7 operates and an image suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5, and in the first final effect, the movable accessory 7 does not operate and the liquid crystal display device 7 does not operate. An image suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot may be displayed in 5. Further, in the second final effect, a louder sound may be output than when the first final effect is executed, a flashy sound (for example, a high sound) may be output, or a long sound may be output. May be done. Further, in the second finalized effect, the confirmation of the jackpot may be suggested by a plurality of images, while in the first finalized effect, the finalized jackpot may be suggested by fewer images than the second finalized effect. Further, in the second final effect, a relatively large image suggests the confirmation of the jackpot, while in the first final effect, an image smaller than the second final effect may suggest the finalization of the jackpot. Further, in the second final effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light in various kinds of colors, while in the first final effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the board lamp 25 and / or in a smaller number of colors than the second final effect. Alternatively, the frame lamp 37 may emit light. Further, in the second final effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light relatively brightly, while in the first final effect, the board lamp 25 and / or the frame lamp 37 emits light darker than the second final effect. You may. Further, in the second final effect, the effect button 26 and the effect lever 28 vibrate strongly, while in the first final effect, the effect button 26 and the effect lever 28 may vibrate weaker than in the second final effect.

(Structure 12)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 12 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output unit for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. (For example, a notice effect or a premier effect) can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, a second effect (for example, SPSP development effect) in which the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from that of the first effect , SPSP reach effect, jackpot confirmation effect), and before executing the first effect, it is possible to execute the first operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operable operating means. Before executing the 2 effects, it is possible to execute the second operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the operable operation means, and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means. During the first operation promotion effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the first operation promotion effect, and during the second operation promotion effect, the execution of the second operation promotion effect. The output of the previously output sound is stopped, the first operation promotion effect is an effect of urging the operation means to operate in the first operation mode, and the second operation promotion effect is the effect of urging the operation means to operate in the first operation mode. This is an effect that encourages operation in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode.

According to this configuration 12, the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect can be performed before the second effect, which has a different expectation of big hit from the first effect and the first effect. For example, the second production may have higher expectations than the first production. In this case, in the second operation promotion effect immediately before the second effect, which has a higher expectation, the operation is performed in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, so that the second operation promotion effect is recognized as a special one. , The expectations of the player can be raised. Further, since the BGM is stopped during the second operation promotion effect, it is possible to concentrate on the operation according to the second operation mode. Further, when the second effect has a higher degree of expectation than the first effect, the operation by the second operation mode occurs less frequently than the operation by the first operation mode, so that the player may be confused by the operation. However, by stopping the BGM, the player can be prepared for the operation and can perform the correct operation.

(Structure 13)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 13 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. A symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, and based on the result of the special game determination, as the variation pattern of the symbol, a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern different from the first variation pattern are used. The effect control means includes a variation pattern determining means for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns including, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means determines the special game. Based on the result, the first effect (for example, a notice effect or a premier effect) can be executed, and based on the result of the special game determination, the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from the first effect. It is possible to execute two effects (for example, SPSP development effect, SPSP reach effect), and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means. It is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution, and during the second effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect is stopped, and the variation pattern determining means is used. When the first variation pattern is determined, the second effect can be executed in the first effect mode, and when the second variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determining means, the first effect The second effect can be executed in a second effect mode different from the mode.

According to this configuration 13, it is possible to give variation to the effect by making the second effect different depending on the variation pattern. Further, in both the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern, the BGM continues in the first effect, so that the continuity of the effect can be maintained. On the other hand, with respect to the second production, since the BGM is stopped in each case, the player can be thrilled and the player can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation is high. Even if the timing at which the second effect is started differs due to the difference in the fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation can be raised by stopping the BGM.

Note that different characters, items, and characters may be displayed between the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode. Further, in the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode, images of the same character, item, or character but in different colors (or patterns) may be displayed. .. Further, the second effect in the first effect mode and the second effect in the second effect mode may be different depending on whether or not the effect image is added to the same image. Further, the second production may be a production with a higher degree of expectation than the first production. Further, the second fluctuation pattern may have a longer fluctuation time than the first fluctuation pattern.

(Structure 14)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 14 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by stopping after changing the symbol. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output unit for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. Is possible, and based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from that of the first effect, and the sound output from the output means can be executed. It is possible to control the output, and during the first effect, it is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the first effect, and during the second effect, the second effect. It is possible to stop the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the first effect, and to continue to output the sound that was output before the execution of the first effect even after the execution of the first effect. After the execution of, it is possible to output a sound different from the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect.

According to this configuration 14, the continuity of the effect can be maintained by not changing the type of BGM before and after the execution of the first effect. On the other hand, by stopping the BGM during the execution of the second effect and outputting another BGM after the execution of the second effect, it is possible to smoothly switch the effect. In addition, by stopping the BGM that had been playing before switching to another BGM, it can be expected that the production will develop with a high degree of expectation.

It is not necessary to change the volume of the BGM before and after the execution of the first effect. Further, the volume of the BGM may be changed before and after the execution of the second effect. For example, after the execution of the second effect, the volume of the BGM may be raised more than before the execution of the first effect. In addition, the second effect may be an effect that suggests that a special game is more likely to be performed than the first effect.

(Structure 15)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 15 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of determination, an output means for outputting sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means can display a background image on the display means. , The first effect (for example, advance notice effect or premier effect) can be executed based on the result of the special game determination, and the degree of expectation that the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination is the first. It is possible to execute a second effect (for example, SPSP development effect) different from the first effect, and it is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means. During the first effect, the first effect is performed. It is possible to continue the reproduction process of the sound that was output before the execution of the effect, and during the second effect, the output of the sound that was output before the execution of the second effect is stopped, and the second effect is , This is an effect of dimming at least a part of the background image.

According to this configuration 15, for example, by darkening the display screen (blackout) and stopping the BGM as the second effect, it is possible to make the effect appear to have stopped, raising expectations for the next effect. be able to. The second effect may be an effect that suggests that a special game is more likely to be performed than the first effect.

(Structure 16)
When the starting condition is satisfied, the gaming machine according to the configuration 16 has a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the special game by changing the symbol and then stopping the game. The effect control means includes a symbol control means for notifying the result of the determination, an output unit for outputting a sound, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is a first effect based on the result of the special game determination. Is possible, the second effect can be executed based on the result of the special game determination, and the output control of the sound output from the output means can be performed. , It is possible to continue the reproduction process of the first sound that was output before the execution of the first effect, and during the second effect, of the second sound that was output before the execution of the second effect. The first effect is started when the output is stopped and the first time elapses from the start of reproduction of the first sound, and the second time elapses from the start of reproduction of the first sound. There is a time when the first effect is started, and the second effect is started when the third time elapses from the start of reproduction of the second sound.

According to this configuration 16, the first effect may start when the first time elapses from the start of BGM playback, or may start when the second time elapses, while the second effect. Starts when a fixed third time has elapsed from the start of BGM reproduction. That is, since the first effect is started at a random reproduction position of the BGM, the effect can be made unexpected. On the other hand, since the second effect is started at a fixed playback position in the BGM, the player can predict the start timing of the second effect in time with the music.

The third time may differ depending on the variation pattern of the symbol.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 LCD display device 7 Movable accessory 11 1st start port 12 2nd start port 13 Grand prize opening 24 Speaker 25 Board lamp 26 Production button 28 Production lever 37 Frame lamp 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd Special symbol display 51 Decorative symbol 52 Hold display 53 Fluctuating display 55 Fourth symbol 60 Premier character 65 Predetermined character 80, 83 Button image 81, 84 Validity period image 101, 131, 141, 151 CPU
130 Production control unit 140 Image sound control unit 150 Lamp control unit

Claims (1)

When the starting condition is satisfied, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game.
A symbol control means for notifying the result of the special game determination by changing the symbol and then stopping the symbol.
Output means to output sound and
Equipped with a production control means to control the production,
The effect control means
It is possible to receive a given signal,
Based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to execute the first effect and the second effect in which the degree of expectation that the special game is performed is different from that of the first effect.
Before executing the first effect or the second effect, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the operable operating means.
It is possible to control the output of the sound output from the output means.
During the operation promotion effect and the first effect, the output of the first sound that was output before the execution of the operation promotion effect can be continued, and during the operation promotion effect and the second effect, the operation promotion is performed. Stop the output of the second sound that was output before the production was executed,
A gaming machine capable of outputting a specific sound suggesting the possibility that a special game is executed during a predetermined period in which the second sound is stopped after the start of the operation promotion effect.

Images